Home

LISTSERV Maestro 2.0 Data Administrator - L

Contents

1. There are many ways to enter conditions to filter members of a dataset or list subscribers The type of profile field determines what types of filtering can take place Wildcards and operators can assist with filtering e Text Field Filtering Fields based on text can be filtered using the following operators and wildcards Text Box Content Filtering Result empty No filtering all members displayed GINA All members with a field value of GINA GINA All members with a field value of GINA lt GINA gt All members with a field value not equal to GINA lt GINA All members with a field value less than GINA less than in terms of alphabetical order lt GINA All members with a field value less than or equal to GINA less than in terms of alphabetical order gt GINA Ala members with a field value greater than GINA greater than in terms of alphabetical order gt GINA All members with a field value greater than or equal to GINA greater than in terms of alphabetical order GINA All members with a field value that starts with GINA GINA All members with a field value that ends with GINA 65 The text GINA was used as an example in this table Any text string can be filtered using these rules The number 23 was used as an rules Text Box Content Filtering Result GINA
2. Click Finish to save the target group and return to the Recipient Target Groups screen Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups This target group type is based on the recipients type Send to an Existing LISTSERV List as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a job Multiple screens take the data administrator through the process of defining a recipient target group using LISTSERV Maestro to select recipients from a LISTSERV List 14 1 General The General screen in the wizard defines the name category and description of the target group Both name and description are mandatory Enter a meaningful name and a good description so the regular users who are selecting target groups in the recipients wizard will have all the information they need to decide which target group to use Target groups can be clustered in categories making it easier for regular users to select a target group A category is meant to contain target groups that are related to each other The intent of categories is to minimize the time needed to locate a specific target group By selecting a Category first users do not need to browse through all the available target groups but only those in the relevant category To add a target group to a category select the category for the target group from the drop down menu To create a new category click the New Category link and define a new category by 98 entering its
3. Arguments text Type Text The text string to convert to a number Examples ToNum 12345 ToNum amp AGE ToNum 123 456 Note The result of the last example will not be the number 579 but will instead be the number 123456 i e first the string concatenation operator is applied to the two strings and then the resulting string is converted into a number ToUpper Function Returns the given text argument with all letters Return Type Text converted to uppercase letters ToUpper text Arguments text Type Text The text string to convert to uppercase Examples ToUpper convert all lowercase to uppercase 162 Date and Time Patterns The format of the date and time patterns must be specified for the functions ToDate and ToDateValue to convert a numerical date time value represented in milliseconds since Jan 1 1970 00 00 00 GMT into a formatted output string or vice versa The pattern format described here applies to the formatting process when a numerical date time value is converted into a formatted text string and to the parsing process when a text string is parsed to convert it back into the numerical date time value This is a direct representation of the formatting offered by the Java class SimpleDateFormat so the description of the format as given here has been taken more or less directly fr
4. Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Message Limits Size Message Limits The following settings specify limits for the data that is sent to the list Leave afield empty to set the limit to unlimited Limit each message to 1 MB Maximum postings allowed per day for whole list Maximum postings allowed per day for each user 10 Click Next gt to continue These restrictions affect the sender of messages to the LISTSERV list when they are submitted as standard list postings A standard list posting is a normal e mail message sent to the list with no mail merging Standard list messages can be received in a digest form and can be viewed in the list archives if archives have been created for the list Standard list messages limit the type of available tracking to blind tracking only 7 3 7 Topics for Moderated Discussion Lists Large active LISTSERV lists often use sub groups within the list to give subscribers the opportunity to receive only the posts to the list they are most interested in Sub groups are created in LISTSERV by defining the keyword Topics in the list header Lists can have up to 23 topics defined in the header List subscribers can elect to receive only those messages that fit into the topic s they are interested in reading Similarly messages can be posted on
5. Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list List Administrator E Mail Addresses General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling Please enter the list administrator owner e mail addresses in the field below one per List Administrator E Mail Addresses deta ia sjames xYzZCompany com es XYZCompany com bcho XYZCompany com bcho xYZCompany com slopez x ZCompany com General List Options M Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode V Use mail merging V Send acknowledgement message to posting subse 4 change to this option affects only subscribers who joii submitted Click OK to accept the administrator address and return to the General Options tab 41 There are three General List Options for announcement lists that can be enabled by checking the adjacent check box They are DIGEST Mode Check the box next to Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode to give subscribers the opportunity to receive a digest of the list s postings List digests group list messages together and send them in one message If a list has many postings allowing subscribers to receive a digest cuts down the number of messages they get per day Mail Merging Check the box next to Use mail merging to allow the system to insert subscriber specific content into the message based upon the data associated with each subscriber More information on using mail merging can be found in Acknowl
6. Number Number fields accept any whole integers Boolean Boolean fields are based on two states one being true the other false e Mandatory Decide whether the data is mandatory for subscribers to enter into the web form or optional Boolean fields cannot be optional due to the nature of the data type the selection equates to either true or false 27 After list fields are created they can be edited removed moved up or moved down by using the corresponding links on the right side of the table Fields that are part of the dataset cannot be moved or edited from this screen Figure 22 Hosted LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Fields LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field General Fields Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields The list below displays the shared fields of the recipient dataset together with the profile fields of the LISTSERY list Click Add Field to add a new field to the list Click on the links next to the list field to select it for editing or to remove the field from the list Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared fied These fields LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared fied Delong to the USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared fied dataset and SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field cann
7. This page summarizes the settings of the LISTSERV fist Chek Finish to accept the changes Click Cancol ta return to the reagent dataset details page without saving your ch Public List Acoess Access for subseril F Closed for maintenance General Settings List Name DEVELOP XYZ List Description discussion list for XYZ developers moderated by software engineering Profile Fields Data Name Display Name Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shered held USERNAME S Toxt SOFTWARE Number of xyz products currently owned Number DOB sty of bart Tent HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean Leave uncheckod fe 1 for text mail BETATEST Check box if interested in beta testing Boolean n a Full Name Fields FNAME LNAME List Type Settings Type of List Moderated Otscussion List Moderator E Mail Address es jjones dev XYZCompany com ddukaneddev KXYZCompany com Action required by moderator to approve list postings for distribution Optional List Settings Archival mode for list One file par month Mail Merging Mail morging is enabled Digest Mode ers are allowed to enable DIGEST mode Bounce Handling ced e mail addresses are remo 8 from the list automatically after 10 bounces in 4 days Acknowledgement for Postings Send acknowl
8. depending on their context and content see the Type Determination below for details Usage Optional merge fields are fields that may be undefined empty for at least some recipients in the recipient list Recipients with a blank field would not have the result of the calculation formula displayed in their content An optional merge field expression is written in the following way 151 amp FIELD_NAME DEFAULT The whole expression is enclosed in brackets and Between the brackets first type the name of the merge field being addressed enclosed with amp and Next type the default that will be used for all recipients where the merge field itself is undefined The default that is replaced by DEFAULT as shown above must be a constant number or a constant text literal Examples amp NAME no name amp NAME amp STATE n a amp ACCOUNT_BALANCE 0 Note the second example defines an empty text as the default for sNAME Type Determination Whenever any such merge field appears in a formula it will first be replaced with the field value for the current recipient or if that value is undefined or empty it will be replaced with the given default Then the result of the formula is calculated for that recipient To be able to do this calculation the expression s type is determined just like for standard merge field expre
9. General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define how bounced messages will be handled by the LISTSERV list Action to Take on Bounces C Remove subscribers immediately on first bounce Remove subscribers after 10 bounces within days Collect bounces for manual processing The next tab List Archives will only appear if archives have been enabled in the HUB List archives are a searchable history of all the messages posted to the list Disabled Enabled Click the adjacent option button to enable or disable archives for the list Although the ability to have archives is granted in the HUB archives for individual lists can be disabled here Create new archive files Set the time frame for the creation of new archive files using the drop down menu Archives can be created on a weekly monthly or yearly basis Archive viewable by Sets the access level for list archives Archives can be open to anyone subscriber or non subscriber of a list open to only subscribers or open to administrators only Figure 28 LISTSERV List Wizard Archives List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define the archive behavior of the LISTSERV list Archive Postings to This List Disabled Enabled Create new archive files Every week 7 The Archive will be viewable by Anyon
10. My Lists My Profile You are subscribed with the e mail address ugodocgal hotmail com Yes TALK BACK TO Edit Profile Join our open discussion list for XYZ Unsubscribe customers Share your tips and tricks with other users of XYZ software The most Use the links below to manage your membership settings creative ideas will be published in our Change your e mail address and other profile data award winning monthly newsletter Change your login password XYZ Monthly Newsletter Subscribe Join our monthly XYZ Company newsletter and receive special online sales annoucements product reviews money saving coupons and much more Unsubscribe from all mailing lists and delete your profile 10 2 Subscribing to a List There are two different ways that people can self subscribe to a list They can join a membership area as described in Section 10 1 Joining a Membership Area Dataset and subscribe to the lists displayed there or they can subscribe to a list directly if the data administrator has made the list subscription link accessible to anyone 10 2 1 Subscribing from the Membership Area Once a member anyone can subscribe themselves to any visible lists from the My Lists tab Any lists that a member is not subscribed to has a Subscribe link in the Action column By clicking this link and filling out any mandatory list specific fields a member becomes subscribed to the list Once a m
11. Removes subscribers listed in the file from the list The file has only to contain the e mail addresses of those members to be deleted all other columns are ignored 69 Figure 65 Upload Wizard Type Modify Recipient Dataset Members by Upload Type Source Cancel The uploaded file can be use from the dataset Add to Dataset Adds new members found il C Update in Dataset Updates existing dataset m dataset C Synchronize with Datas Adds new members found il the file C Full Synchronize with D As synchronize but additio uploaded file Remove from Dataset Removes the members fro Select the type of modification from the list Modification Type Modify List Subscribers by Upload Type Details Cancel Modification Type The uploaded file can be used to modify the subscribers of the list including the values for shared dataset fields or delete a set of subscribers from the list Add to List Adds new subscribers found in the file to the list Leaves all existing list subscribers unchanged Update in List Updates existing list subscribers with the values found in the file Does not add any new subscribers to the list Synchronize with List Adds new subscribers found in the file to the list and updates existing list subscribers with the values found in the file Full Synchronize with List As synchronize but additionally removes existing subscriber
12. Sender according to the From address in the posting List as a new posting O C Both Sender amp List c Separate Address The next tab Bounce Handling determines what happens to the subscriber addresses when messages sent to them bounce are rejected from the e mail server and returned to the sender undeliverable LISTSERV lists can handle bounces by removing the subscriber addresses of bounced messages automatically or by collecting bounces for manual action Manually 42 processed bounces are sent to the list administrator s address Select one of the three available the bounce processing options Remove immediately after first bounce The address that bounced the mail will be removed from the list after the first bounce Subscribers will have to be re added to the list to receive any additional mail Remove subscribers after X bounces within X days Enter the number of bounces that are permitted in the first text box and the number days they can occur over in the second box This setting is more flexible than the first setting in that if the reason for the bounce is temporary such as a full mailbox the message can be sent again within the set number of days Subscribers will not be removed from the list if the message can be delivered within the set number of allowable bounces and days Collect bounces for manual processing Bounce addresses will be sent to a specific a
13. Click here to enter add a new category Description Descriptions should assist regular users in selecting the most appropriate target group for their jobs Web signup form data Category lt No Category gt Y Selects NAME AGE GENDER from international database 15 2 Source The Source screen for a target group based on an uploaded text file contains two options concerning when the recipients file will be uploaded to the system Select Define recipients now to upload immediately a file from a local drive that will become the source of the recipients for the target group Once the file is uploaded the recipient definition is static meaning it will not change between the upload time and the job delivery time Select Load recipients just before sending from a server file to link to a file on the server running LISTSERV Maestro to become the source of the recipients for the target group just before the job is sent for delivery This recipient definition is dynamic meaning that the file containing the recipients can change between the time the target group is defined and the time the mail job is delivered Select the option button Define recipients now to enable the link Upload a recipients file Click the link to upload a text file from a local drive Browse for the file on a local drive and select the encoding for the file if necessary For more information on encoding
14. standard list postings A standard list posting is a normal e mail message sent to the list with no mail merging Standard list messages can be received in a digest form and can be viewed in the list archives if archives have been created for the list Standard list messages limit the type of available tracking to blind tracking only Size Message Limits Sets a size limit for each message posted to the list The size can be limited by the number of lines in the message the number of kilobits KB or the number of megabits MB of the message The total number of messages allowed to be posted to the list for the day can be set as well as the total number of postings per user per day Fields left blank will have no limitations imposed Figure 43 LISTSERV List Wizard Size and Message Limits Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Message Limits Size Message Limits The following settings specify limits for the data that is sent to the list Leave afield empty to set the limit to unlimited Limit each message to i MB Maximum postings allowed per day for whole list Maximum postings allowed per day for each user 10 Click Next gt to continue These restrictions affect the sender of messages to the LISTSERV list when they are submitted as standard list postings
15. Germany MMM dd yyyy de AT locale for language de German and country AT Austria formats the current date using the default U S locale formats the current date using the pre defined formats the current date using a custom 159 ToLower ToLower text Function Returns the given text argument with all letters converted to lowercase letters Return Type Text Arguments text Type Text The text string to convert to lowercase Examples ToLower Convert All UPPERCASE to Lowercase ToMillis ToMillis datet ext formatpattern localename langcode countrycode Function Returns the numerical value representing the date time as parsed from a text string argument where the numerical value specifies the date time in milliseconds since Jan 1 1970 00 00 00 GMT can then be compared to the output of the functions CurrentMillis and SubscribeTimeMillis or be used as input to ToDate The format used to parse the given date time text string is specified with the given format argument Note For parsing purposes LISTSERV Maestro will by default assume the U S locale and the time zone of the server where the LUI component is running i e if locale specific texts like weekday names names of months etc are contained in the date time text string they must ap
16. SELECT recipient_id as id state city email_address as EMAIL r F NAME r L_NAME as NAME r F_ NAME as FIRSTNAME r INTEREST1 as moer wo Enter the SQL statement here m MODEL_NAME x Parameter placeholders in the SQL statement are enclosed by the following tags Opening Tag ja Closing Tag The recipients will be retrieved During recipient definition Just before sending Decide when the recipients will be retrieved from the database Click Next gt to continue 16 3 Parameters If parameters are part of the SQL statement on the Source screen they will need to be further defined on the Parameters screen All parameters appear as clickable links Parameters highlighted in yellow are undefined and parameters appearing as normal links have already been defined Click on any parameter highlighted or not to select it Fill out the parameter s initial definition or edit an existing definition in the lower part of the screen The definition of the parameters made here will affect the choices that the end user will have when using this target 120 group in the recipients wizard For more information on creating parameters and the different parameter types see Section 18 Defining Parameters Figure 115 Target Group Wizard Parameters Target Group Definition General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back
17. The source job it is that will be examined will be specified by the end user who uses the target group in the recipients wizard Here in the condition definition it is enough to know that whatever source job will be selected it will be a job that was in turn delivered to the same hosted recipient list as the one that this target group is based on or more precisely the source job used a target group which was based on the same hosted recipient list as this target group The Edit Job Based Condition dialog box allows you to define how the source job will be examined The following options are available e All current subscribers which were recipients of the original source job If selected the condition node evaluates to true for all subscribers currently on the hosted recipient list that have also been recipients of the source job that will be selected in the recipients wizard For any subscribers that were not recipients of the source job because they did not fulfill the source job s condition or because they only subscribed to the list after the source job was delivered the condition evaluates to false If this choice is selected you may optionally specify to examine the tracking events of the source job to filter further the recipients e All current subscribers which were NOT recipients of the original source job The negated version of the above condition If selected the condition node evaluates to true for all subscribers
18. gt List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERV list List Administrator E Mail Addresses General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling Please enter the list administrator owner e mail addresses in the field below one per List Administrator E Mail Addresses he sjames xYZCompany com ames XYZCompany com bcho XYZCompany com bcho xYZCompany cam Eat slopez xYZCompany com General List Options M Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode V Use mail merging V Send acknowledgement message to posting subscy 4 change to this option affects only subscribers who joil submitted OK Cancel Click OK to accept the administrator address and return to the General Options tab There are three General List Options for announcement lists that can be enabled by checking the adjacent check box They are e DIGEST Mode Check the box next to Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode to give subscribers the opportunity to receive a digest of the list s postings List digests are lf a list has many postings allowing subscribers to receive a digest cuts down the number of messages they get per day e Mail Merging Check the box next to Use mail merging to allow the system to insert subscriber specific content into the message based upon the data associated with each subscriber More information on using mail merging can be found in e Acknowl
19. lt a gt lt td gt lt th gt lt input gt lt select gt small emphasis error disabled emphasisBackground EditField The main body of the HTML page Styles defined for this tag for example for the font background and so on define the default styles for the whole page The other HTML tags inherit this style and can then overwrite it where necessary The standard text paragraph Used for all text that does not fall into a special case The level 1 header Used for the header of each page The level 2 header Used for sub level headers to separate different parts on the same page The link tag Used for all clickable links The table cell tag Used for all table cells The table header cell tag Used for the header of the table that contains the mailing lists in the current category when viewed in the member area The input tag Used for single line edit fields checkboxes and buttons The select tag Used for single select drop down lists and multiple select boxes Custom style class small Used to render text smaller than the normal text for comments and list descriptions for example Custom style class emphasis Used to render phrases or individual words in an emphasized style Custom style class error Used to render error messages Custom style class emphasisBackground Used to render table cells or whole tables in an emphasized style by giving them a background which stan
20. optional address and optionally a name Header Definition FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demo soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Yanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n Ursula maestro dema lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demo soft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Click Next gt to continue 15 5 Duplicate Elimination On the Duplicate Elimination screen define how duplicate recipients that may exist in the text file will be handled Choose between the following options Do not remove duplicates All recipients in the text file will be used for delivery even if some of them are duplicates Remove duplicates with the same e mail addresses If the text file contains entries with the same e mail address then only the first of these entries will be used for delivery the others will be ignored Use my list of columns to determine duplicates If the text file contains entries
21. All members with a field value with GINA in it somewhere Number Field Filtering Fields that are based on numbers can be filtered using the following operators and wildcards Text Box Content Filtering Result empty No filtering all members displayed 23 All members with a field value of 23 23 All members with a field value of 23 lt 23 gt All members with a field value not equal to 23 lt 23 All members with a field value less than 23 lt 23 All members with a field value less than or equal to 23 gt 23 Ala members with a field value greater than 23 gt 23 All members with a field value greater than or equal to 23 23 All members with a field value that starts with 23 23 All members with a field value that ends with 23 23 All members with a field value with 23 in it somewhere example in this table Any number can be filtered using these 66 e Boolean Fields Fields that are based on Boolean logic display a drop down menu with the choice of three filters Filter Choice Filtering Result ignore No filtering all members displayed True All members with a field value of T for true False All members with a field value of F for false e Single Select Fields Fields that are based on single selection menus can be filtered using the same rules for filterin
22. All the fields that appear in the dataset and in a particular list can be used as merged fields for messages sent to that list To create a new hosted LISTSERV recipient list first select the dataset the list will be added to from the Recipient Datasets and Lookup Tables screen The Recipient Dataset Details screen opens This screen is split into two frames The left frame will display all the lists if any that belong to the open dataset Datasets with many lists can use folders called categories to organize lists so that they are easier to find See Section 8 Organizing Datasets for more information When LISTSERV Maestro creates a LISTSERV list it is assembling a list header that is made up of key words The key words define the settings in the list such as who may send mail to the list who administers the list how are bounces handled and many other settings Once the key words are defined and written to the list header the system can create a LISTSERV list LISTSERV Maestro provides a wizard that can create three different types of LISTSERV list Each type of list provides unique ways for subscribers to manage their settings and communicate The three type of LISTSERV list available are e Announcement List This type of list is used for announcements and newsletters Communication with subscribers is one way stemming from the LISTSERV Maestro sender and going to the subscribers Subscribers are not allo
23. Enabled Mail Type Copy Delete Target Group Type LISTSERY Maestro Retrieves Recipients from Database Description Recipients preference of mail type HTML or plain text Appears as a check box If checked HTML mail will be sent If unchecked plain text mail will be sent Uses maestro_recipients_less table in Oracle customer database Status Enabled Pet Type Copy Delete Target Group Type LISTSERY Maestro Retrieves Recipients from Database Description Selects recipients pet type Appears as a single input field Uses maestro recipients less table in Oracle customer database Status Enabled Select by CITY Copy Delete X Create a new Target Group of the following type Select Create The Recipient Target Groups screen shows the list of target groups in the selected category Choose the category to view from the Category drop down menu The table below will then be refreshed to show all target groups in that category Target groups not assigned to a specific category will be displayed under lt No Category gt in the drop down menu Target groups automatically created by the system for hosted lists will be displayed under lt Hosted Lists Default Target Groups gt Each target group is displayed with the following information Name The name of the target group The name is a clickable link used to open the target group for editing in the target group wizard f
24. Equal The condition is true if the value selected in the field defined as the left operand is equal to the right operand lt gt Not equal The condition is true if the value selected in the field defined as the left operand is not equal to the right operand in The condition is true if the value selected in the field defined as the left operand appears in the elements of the set defined as the right operand notin The condition is true if the value selected in the field defined as the left operand does not appear in the elements of the set defined as the right operand Set Operators Available if the left operand is of the type Field where the field in turn has the datatype Multiple Select The set operators are is the same set as equals The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand is equal to the set defined by the right operand 185 contains only values of subset lt The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand contains only values of the set defined by the right operand Alternatively if the left operand set is a subset of the right operand set contains all values of superset gt The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand contains all values of the set defined by the right operand Alternatively f the left operand set is a superset of the right operand
25. NOASS cs sci secvcesscenewens soewenagcesvbentshewacnoshoetuhentpecuanshcadunestsecees Secedewent codons sedhsbaneashdacebeeteeceenseee 182 Normal Condition Nodes naiinip SRA ein Inline nti ie Se ee ae 183 Left Operandos io atn pisace a a pra aa a e iae aa aor aaa ep evan aR aE peada A S ci atape 184 Operator ntk a aa a MA eB ade ene Ua e ea 184 Right Op rand pka sesiis srianan enna piana pi aAa a aari aaier niaaa oere aeia arie eiiiai AREA 187 Formulasiin Conditions nisse a a aa e a tae a a e a e din teehee eee a a S 188 Parameters iM CONGItONS ea aea e aE a A r AE ae A A E eE AT A a A E E Aaa 189 Job Based Condition NOd S iaieiiea ET oi 190 Examining Tracking Events of the Source JOD eeccceeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesseeeenaeesenenaeens 190 vi Additional Issues with Job Based Conditions and Tracking Events ccceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeenneeeenaa 191 Appendix F E mail and International Character Sets ccccccseesseesseeeseeeseeeenseeesneeeneeeeseeesaseeeseeesaseasseeeaseaseseanes 193 LISTSERV Maestro and International Character Sets 00 c cc eecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesneeeesenaeeeseneeeeeneeeeeenaes 194 Merging Fields with International Character Sets 20 0 0 eeecceecseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseaeeseeeeeesneeeeeenaes 195 International Character Set Recipient Names in the Mail TO Headerr 00 eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesnaeeeeen
26. Section 10 Members Join a Dataset ThemsSe VeS c cccsscesseseseneseeseeesseesoessnesenesseesseesaeeseesaesnaesenesaesenesenesaneaas 80 10 1 Joining a Membership Area Dataset ccccececeecne cee eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee ee eee ceaeaeeeeeeeeecaaeaeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeea 81 10 2 Subsenbing toca H E Ee Net ccovecncectc aa Siete te eceten ts fee Sacer Ned te week eas foot ute aha Mee sete A Se Me dao Aes 83 10 2 1 Subscribing from the Membership Area c ce eeececeeeeeeeeeenneeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeesseeeeneaaes 83 10 2 2 Subscribing from a List UR ee eee ce a testes e a r a aaa ae aa A aA Eai Oan patianiet 83 1 0 3 Sending Mailto Hosted LisStSiin aain n saaie a eaa aa a a a es ais 84 Section 11 Subscriber Access URLs and Customization s ss ssusnrrurnnrenrnnnunrnrnnnnunnnrnnrnnrnnnunnnnnunnnnnnrnnnnn nnn nnn nn 84 11 1 Customizing the Web Formit merisiga a a a eaa a a i aae 85 11 2 Creating a CUSTOM Template secs sices sccusaes secncnsgescdeenszbaennsacecebengheeesscbonddsaptpecusa aaa iaaii eiiiai andaka tienaa aiai 87 Section 12 Introduction to Recipient Target Groups sssssssssnssenssunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnn mannna 88 12 1 Creating Recipient Target Groups ee eececeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeseaaeeeseeeeeeneeeenenaeeeenenaeees 88 12 2 Selecting the Type of Target Group sisinta i e aaa a oe itl eieae
27. area meant to signify that the currently logged in member has subscribed this list Custom style class notsubscribed Used to render the marker in the column Subscribed of the table of available mailing lists in the membership area meant to signify that the currently logged in member has not subscribed this list Custom style class selectedTab Used to render the label and background of the currently selected tab in the membershiparea My Lists or My Profile Custom style class tableThickFrame Used to render the membership area pages to appear in a tabbed style with two tabs for My Lists and My Profile Surrounds the main part of the membership area which sits beneath the two tabs Custom style class tableBottomLine Used in the membership area to render a horizontal separator line between the row that displays the current category and its parent categories as navigatable links this row only appears if there are categories in the dataset and the lower part that shows all mailing lists in the current category Custom style class tableRightLine Used in the membership area to render a vertical separator line between the left column that displays the sub categories of the current category this column only appears if there are sub categories and the part to the right that shows all mailing lists in the current category 174 Default Style Sheet The following table displays the style sheet that
28. checked HTML mail will be sent If unchecked plain text mail will be sent Uses maestro_recipients_less table in Oracle customer database Click on the name Pet Type Description of the target group to select it and proceed toa confirmation screen lt Back Next gt Selects recipients pet type Appears as a single input field Uses maestro recipients less table in Oracle customer database Select by CITY Description Select recipients by city Appears as a drop down menu Uses maestro_recipients_less table in Oracle customer database Le Back to Previously Selected Target Group Define Recipients Source Information about the currently selected recipients target group Target Group Pet Type Description Selects recipients pet type Appears as a single input field Uses maestro recipients4ess table in Oracle customer database Parameters Type in the kind of pet you own Use this link to change Select Different Target Group the selected target group Click Next gt to continue to the Source Details screen 145 If there are parameters in the SQL statement the Source Details screen will display the input values for the target group parameters This screen will appear the same as the Sample Data screen does in the recipient target group wizard Make the desired selections from the checkboxes drop down menus and or
29. e The numeric value supplied for the parameter e The Boolean value supplied for the parameter e The list entry supplied for the parameter e The set supplied for the parameter After this selection is made the last control becomes an edit field where the name of the parameter to define is entered Enter only the name without any enclosing tags this is different than when using a parameter in a formula or SQL statement or LISTSERV condition where the parameter needs to be enclosed in tags to set if off from the rest of the formula statement condition Note that if you specify the same parameter name in different condition nodes it will be interpreted as one parameter that appears several times in the condition tree all appearances will have the same content value and must also all appear in the same type context Number or Text and so on This means that if in one condition node the selection is the text supplied for the parameter and as the parameter name mytext is specified then if same parameter name is specified again in a different condition node the selection must also be the text supplied for the parameter but not for example the numeric value supplied for the parameter Similarly a parameter with the same name is used in a formula somewhere else in the condition tree then all these appearances too will reference the same parameter all of them will be replaced with the same final content during usage in the recipients
30. or select all that apply Digests Archives Auto delete Lists are controlled completely by LISTSERV Lists are created with easy to use list creation wizards in Maestro LISTSERV Maestro Limited to announcement only lists Lists can be announcement lists moderated discussion lists or unmoderated discussion lists Can only send messages using the LISTSERV Can send messages using any e mail client Maestro interface Powerful filters are available using a special Fully capable of executing a query using SQL that the user target group definition wizard to segment and inputs sort recipients Section 6 Creating Hosted Recipient Lists Hosted lists contain data from the dataset They can also have their own data fields that are not shared among lists in the dataset but belong exclusively to the list Lists that do have their own fields will also have their own web subscription forms generated when the list is created All the fields that appear in the dataset and in a particular list can be used as merged fields for messages sent to that list To create a new hosted recipient list first select the dataset the list will be added to from the Recipient Datasets and Lookup Tables screen The Recipient Dataset Details screen opens This screen is split into two frames The left frame will display all the lists if any that belong to the open dataset Datasets with many lists can use folders called categories to o
31. see Appendix F E mail and International Character Sets 110 Figure 105 Define Recipients from an Uploaded File Define Recipients Options Source Cancel lt Back Next gt Upload a File Source Select the text file containing the recipients Press the Upload button to replace the current recipients file with the new file rear 7 p he Cancel ke h tly fil Information about the recipients source file ress the Cancel button to keep the currently saved recipients file File Name Browse Encoding West European ISO 1 Recipients File Define recipients now Upload a recipients file Load recipients just before sending from a server file File Name File Encoding Note The given file name and path must be a valid path on the server running LISTSERV Maestro Figure 106 Uploaded File Define Recipients Options Source Source Details Recipients Details Cancel lt Back Next gt Source Information about the recipients source file Recipients File Define recipients now Source File recipients csy Upload Date Time Feb 7 2003 02 54 16 PM Upload a different file C Load recipients just before sending from a server file File Name l File Encoding Note The given file name and path must be a valid path on the server running LISTSERY Maestro Once a file had been uploaded infor
32. 14 4 Parameters santa hen n e eter ee hee i he ei et 103 14 4 1 LISTSERV Topics as Parameters 00 ee ee ceeceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeesnneeeeeenaeeeeseeeeeenieeeenead 103 14 4 2 Conditional Expression Parameters 0 ce eccceeeeseeee cence eeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeenneeeeneaeeeseeeeenneeeenead 104 14 5 Input Layt sss tec esheseerebad tees a a aed eee sees Hee ceed eee a ted eed E dans te ee fen tenets oe 105 14 5 1 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists With TODpiCs 000 00 eecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeenneeeeeenaeeeseeaeenneeeeneaa 105 14 5 2 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists with Parameters in Conditions 20 0 0 ees eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeenneeeeee 106 14 6 Input PrevieW innn nene ee ee ee ee eee eee 106 14 7 Recipients Details i ninrinman sne a eee cnec sie deeb a N iaaea Ne ieai Teie 107 MASS SUMMARY cieri e a eea ag aa Jose E aE athe eae eA aaa aaa iea aaia 108 Section 15 Target Groups Based on an Uploaded Text File ccssecceseseeeeesseeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeseeeeeesseeeeenseeeesenes 109 15 1 Generau rayi u a a a a lie E a E E eles ea a a 109 MEAO e E E T EA E T ET 110 15 3 Source Detall San pipo ae a a a te Send aE a eh aa aa a ea aa Eea ea ne 112 15 4 Recipient Details EEE E E E 114 15 4 1 Usage otf Recipients Data irise i t a A a A Aa e eaa ea aa n EA a Ea 114 15 4 2 Recipient Identification COIUMIS 0 0 eee eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseea
33. Click the Edit link to add a new address or edit the existing ones in the pop up dialog box Entries must contain a valid Internet e mail address Figure 25 LISTSERV List Wizard Set the List Administrator LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field F era Galde Makada G General Fields Details List Type List Options Cancel Save amp Exit List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERV list List Administrator E Mail Addresses Please enter the list administrator owner e General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling mail addresses in the field below one per row List Administrator E Mail Addresses General List Options F Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode Ismith xXYZCompany com M Use mail merging Click OK to accept the administrator address and return to the General Options tab 30 Two General List Options for announcement lists that can be enabled by checking the adjacent check box They are e DIGEST Mode Check the box next to Allow subscribers to enable DIGEST mode to give subscribers the opportunity to receive a digest of the list s postings List digests group list messages together and send them in one message If a list has many postings allowing subscribers to receive a digest cuts down the number of messages they get per day e Mail Merging Mail merging uses any recipient data headings to insert subscribe
34. Create New Dataset button to open the wizard Use the Next gt and lt Back buttons navigate page by page through the wizard Use the links at the top of the screen to open a particular page of the wizard The Save amp Exit button will save the current dataset settings of the open dataset even though the wizard may not be completed The Cancel button will void any current selections and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen 10 The recipient dataset definition wizard is comprised of four main screens The first screen General defines the general information pertaining to the dataset e Name The name of the dataset will appear on all the public subscriber pages It is important to select a name that is reflective of the organization sponsoring the web pages and descriptive of the types of mailing lists available for members e List Administrator e mail address The list administrator e mail address is the address that confirmation e mail messages comes from Confirmation e mail is sent to all subscribers who join a member area and or subscribe to any mailing list Confirmation e mail is also sent to members to when they change their passwords It is important that this address be an authentic e mail address that can receive mail from subscribers e Internal Description This description information is used internally on the Recipient Datasets tab for identification purposes e Encoding Sele
35. Definition Btn pairs lt A ia faye eee ren review Recipients Duplicate Gi tas General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Details Elimination Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Sample Data This page shows a preview of the parameter input page as it will be displayed during a recipient definition based on this target group Verify that the layout is satisfactory If not or go back to the previous pages to change the settings To continue in the wizard make a valid selection for each of the parameters below Your input values will be used to determine a set of sample recipients that is required for the next wizard pages Demographics State a Select one or more UT TX X Age between i5 and 75 Mail preference HTML fv Check which type s of recipients to include Text j You must select at least one of HTML or text otherwise no recipients will be selected The values entered in the Sample Data screen are used to fill out the actual target group SQL statement the same way as it will later happen in the recipients wizard The SQL statement will be executed and retrieve up to ten sample recipients that will be displayed on the next screen Recipients Details The filled out statement will be displayed on the Summary screen of the wizard as further verification that the statement and the parameters are correct If this is the first time the target
36. Encoding west European ISO 1 z vstemtryaaan Use this link to have the system attempt to parse the file again Header Row Yes the first row in the file contains the headers No the file does not have a header row Preview EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demo soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 3 xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier xero no way Wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl Toby maestro demolsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky Seth maestro dema lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer Ron maestro demo soft com Ron Remmington remmer Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways Refresh Preview eUre WeFeN AN FS W 3 w we 3 H BT I S I a 3 Sp S 5 ae fae 3 a lt Foe a foe Bae SS LISTSERV Maestro has four selections for choosing separator characters e Tab t e Comma e Semicolon e Other if this is chosen type the character into the adjacent box Columns can be defined as not enclosed by a quote character or select the quote character from three choices e Double Quotes e Apostrophe e Other if this is chosen type the character into the adjacent box 113 After separator and quote characters have been entere
37. General Information Name xYZ Developers List Description xyz Developers discussion list This target group definition meets all necessary requirements for the definition of recipients Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group LISTSERY List DEVELOP XYZ Contribution Type Send individual distribution messages to list members no bounce reporting possible allows mail merging and personal unique and blind tracking Options MAIL Send this message to normally subscribed users Condition ssoftware software sHTML mail_ type Parameters software Software project Enter the software project being developed mail_type Check for HTML mail Recipients Details Name Column FULL_NA amp AME Mail Merge Columns FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML BETATEST Click Finish to complete the target group definition and return to the Recipient Target Groups screen Section 15 Target Groups Based on an Uploaded Text File This target group type is based on the recipients type Upload a Recipients Text File as available in the recipients wizard during recipient definition of a job Multiple screens take the data administrator through the process of defining a recipient target group using LISTSERV Maestro to select recipients from an uploaded text file 15 1 General General characteristics of the target group are comprised of a name a category and a description
38. List Options Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Type Specify if the LISTSERV list will be used for announcements only or if list subscribers may post messages to the list and if the discussion traffic on the list will be moderated C Announcement List Unmoderated Discussion List Select the type of list from the options provided C Moderated Discussion List Click Next gt to continue 7 2 5 List Options for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The List Options screen is divided into tabbed pages General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling and List Archive The last tab List Archive is optional and will not appear unless archives have been set up in the HUB For more information on archives see the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual All list types require that a list administrator called a list owner be set on the General Options tab Enter at least one e mail address that will become the administrator owner of the LISTSERV list Click the Edit link to add a new address or edit the existing ones in the pop up dialog box Entries must contain a valid Internet e mail address Figure 37 LISTSERV List Wizard Set the List Administrator LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field Posting a J a st Pi General Fields Details List Type List Options Restrictions Topics Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Options
39. List Options Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Type Specify if the LISTSERV list will be used for announcements only or if list subscribers may post messages to the list and if the discussion traffic on the list will be moderated C Announcement List C Unmoderated Discussion List Moderated Discussion List Select the type of list from the options provided Click Next gt to continue 7 3 5 List Options for Moderated Discussion Lists The List Options screen is divided into tabbed pages General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling and List Archive The last tab List Archive is optional and will not appear unless archives have been set up in the HUB For more information on archives see the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual All LISTSERV list types require that a list administrator called a list owner be set on the General Options tab Enter at least one e mail address that will become the administrator owner of the LISTSERV list Click the Edit link to add a new address or edit the existing ones in the pop up dialog box Entries must contain a valid Internet e mail address 51 Figure 49 LISTSERV List Wizard Set the List Administrator LISTSERV List Definition n Profile Profile Field ne Pasting a i aa General Fields Details List Type List Options Restrictions Topics Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next
40. Maestro Internally LISTSERV Maestro uses pure Unicode allowing for the mixture of any characters in e mail including the subject line and any data merged from uploaded files or selected from a database as long as there is a way of inputting them For some languages this simply requires the installation of a special keyboard and display driver for that language Other languages such as Asian languages may require a special keyboard this depends on the language and on the computer s operating system For sending LISTSERV Maestro needs to decide on a charset that it can use to encode the message Specify the charset to use while defining the content there is a special item for this on the content definition page or tell LISTSERV Maestro that it should attempt to automatically determine which charset is the optimal one for the text contained in the message In the latter case LISTSERV Maestro scans the written text to determine the optimal charset If the message uses characters that can be displayed with the ASCII charset the case with most English language texts LISTSERV Maestro will choose the ASCII charset If the message contains characters outside of the ASCII range but that can still be displayed with one of the supported ISO 8859 charsets then LISTSERV Maestro will choose the corresponding ISO 171 8859 charset Optionally only if LISTSERV Maestro is set to allow Unicode the message has characters that canno
41. Next gt Parameters Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing Enter the input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement SQL Statement SELECT customer_id as customerid first_name as firstname last_name as lastname city state email_address as email FROM maetest WHERE state IN statesel Parameter Details S 5 The label appears to the end user to identify what input is required Parameter statesel oe A description can Label State appear after the input to assist the end user Description State of residence optional Input Type Selection List Multiple Values z Pag ced Adidas oa that appears Specify whether to C Specify list entries manually Retrieve list entries from database type the list entries in manually or have SQL Statement them retrieved from select distinct STATE from mae_recipients the database Enter a SELECT statement here that will determine the selection list values available to the end user E Once a label and an optional description have been entered select the input type of the parameter There are four different types of input for parameters check box edit field selection list and date and or time 16 4 Input Layout The nput Layout screen allows the data administrator to design how the recipient target group appears to regular users Heading and additional screen
42. Text Text Text Subscriber Access URLs page Subscriber Access Template Fields formatted in bold are mandatory fi Delete all Members Delete Dataset XYZ Company Quick Access This page gives you shortcut access to all public pages of XYZ Company Login J http papaya ease Isoft com list login html mContainer 53 amp m0wner 5 Join Member Area http papaya ease soft com list subscribe html mContainer 53 amp mO0wner 5 Subscribe List DEVELOP http papaya ease Isoft com list subscribe html mContainer 53 amp 2m0wner 5 amp mListSeqno 166 Subscribe List NEWS FROM http papaya ease Isoft com list subscribe html mContainer 532m0wner S5 amp mListSeqno 164 Subscribe List TALK BACK TO http papaya ease soft com list subscribe html mContainer S53amO0wner SamListSeqno 163 Subscribe List XYZ Monthly Newsletter http papaya ease Isoft com list subscribe html mContainer 53 amp mO0wner S5 amp mListSeqNo 162 Click on each of the subscriber access URLs to view what the public pages look like After seeing what the public sees it may be necessary to go back and edit the dataset fields or list fields 11 1 Customizing the Web Form LISTSERV Maestro subscriber access URLs can be customized to fit the scheme of any organization s web site By matching the fonts colors and imagery of subscriber pages to an organization s web presence a unified
43. Wizard Profile Fields Details Selection Field Details Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt ne Profile Fields Details Specify the details for the profile fields Selection Field Details Subscriber Name Definition Input Field Validation The list below contains all profile fields of type Single Select or Multiple Select Please select the lookup table for each of these fields Lookup Table PRODUCT xyz Products Select Countries XYZ Products Click Next gt to continue Lists containing fields of the types Tex and Number can have set validation limits entered so that when the fields are filled in by subscribers only certain types of input will be accepted Click on the tab Input Field Validation to access the field validation settings For example in the column PRICE a monetary value is requested By setting a validation setting for a number range only prices falling within the specified range will be accepted Note Only whole numbers in the form of integers will be accepted Floating point numbers are not accepted in the number field Figure 17 Hosted Recipient List Wizard Profile Fields Details Input Field Validation Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Ne
44. a value that contains a comma Since this comma is inside of the quote characters it is not interpreted as a separator comma but instead as part of the value of the field In addition the first field in the first row contains the quote character which has been escaped Including the quotes the field in its escaped form looks like this John Hammer Cool The two double appearances of the quote character around the word Hammer are not interpreted as quotes that delimit the field but are instead interpreted as single appearances of the quote character which are part of the field value Therefore the un escaped form of the field 168 looks like this John Hammer Cool Similarly the second field of the last row has the un escaped form of Hauser the man 169 Appendix C E mail and International Character Sets Computers store all information in the form of bits or their 8 bit conglomerations bytes Bits are also the entities that are transferred from the sender s computer to the recipients computer whenever an e mail message is sent E mail programs take the message and convert it to bits The message is sent and the receiving e mail client program translates these bits back into a readable message for the recipient This process takes place seamlessly for the sender and the recipient The sender first creates a text message and the recipient receives a text message all the converting remains behind the sc
45. all the important details about the target group for verification The screen is split into categories listing the relevant details for each part of the target group A target group that has been created by the data administrator is not automatically enabled for use in the recipients wizard The data administrator must explicitly enable the use of each target group Target groups need to be enabled individually giving the target group administrator 126 control over the use of each target group This way groups can be created in advance and only enabled when needed Similarly target groups can be disabled preventing users from accessing them without permanently deleting them To enable a target group check the box labeled Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group located under the first category General Information Target groups that are enabled meet all the requirements for the definition of recipients and they are available for use in the recipients wizard To disable a target group uncheck the box labeled Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group This will put the target group into a state called Complete where all the requirements for the definition of recipients are met but the target group is not released for use in the recipients wizard 127 Figure 121 Target Group Wizard Summary Target Group Definition Recipients Duplicate Det
46. below on how to select the URLs to look at NOT At least one open up event The negated version of the first behavior type as described above The condition will be true only for subscribers who did not generate any open up events for the source job NOT At least one click event for any selected URL The negated version of the second behavior type as described above The condition will be true only for subscribers who did not generate any click events for any of the selected URLs see below on how to select the URLs to look at NOT At least one click event for each selected URL The negated version of the third behavior type as described above The condition will be true only for subscribers who did not generate any click events for at least one of the selected URLs see below on how to select the URLs to look at If from the above behavior types one of the four that deal with click events is selected you also need to specify which URLs to look at This is done with the option button located below the drop down list which only becomes enabled if such a behavior type is chosen In this case you have the following choices Fixed list of all tracked links of the source job If selected then the click events of all tracked links in the selected source job will be examined to determine the condition state With this choice the end user who employs this target group in the recipients wizard will not have the choice to
47. by clicking Cancel clicking navigational icons or closing the browser for an existing target group the target group will still exist but all changes made since the last save will not be applied 91 The Finish button is only available on the Summary screen of the wizard The Summary screen only becomes available if the entire wizard is completed If the wizard is closed by clicking Finish then the target group will exist in the Complete or in the Enabled state depending on whether the Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group checkbox on the summary screen was selected or not The Save amp Exit button is available on every screen Clicking this button saves the current state of the wizard allowing the data administrator to re enter the wizard and complete the definition This will put the target group in any of the three states Incomplete Complete or Enabled depending on whether all screens in the wizard were completed and if Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group checkbox on the summary screen was selected or not A completed target group may be enabled at any time by entering the target group wizard and going directly to the Summary screen click on the Summary link in the menu bar On the Summary screen check the box Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group Section 13 Hosted Recipient List Target Groups Recipients for th
48. by the data administrator Alternatively they can add themselves if the dataset membership area or any lists in the dataset are visible to the public on the Web Anyone joining a membership area using the web form has the option of subscribing to any available lists there Subscribing directly to a list using the lists web form will automatically add the subscriber to the lists dataset More information on self subscribing to membership areas and lists is covered in Section 10 Members Join a Dataset Themselves Once members belong to a dataset they can be managed within the dataset by the data administer Management can take place at the dataset level and at the list level The data administrator can search for members delete members change a member s data add a single member modify multiple members by uploading a file and download all members Members of a dataset are managed by selecting the dataset Subscribers to a list are managed by selecting the list To perform an action on members in a dataset select the dataset from the Recipient Datasets and Lookup Tables screen The Recipient Dataset Details screen opens Click the Actions link in the right corner to open the actions menu 60 Figure 59 Managing Members of a Dataset Recipient Dataset Details a W xyz Company L DEVELOP xYz j NEWS FROM XYZ j TALK BACK TO XxY XYZ Monthly News Dataset Info Name XYZ Company
49. counterparts do not adhere strictly to the mathematical definition of a subset or superset In mathematics the empty set is always a subset of any other set and consequently any non empty set is always a superset of the empty set In regard to the empty set the above operators behave differently For these operators the empty set is never a subset of any other set and similarly no set can be a superset of the empty set Formula Operators Formulas as the operands are a special case when it comes to the operator Normally the left operand defines the datatype and thus the available operators For formulas however the datatype is not known until the formula is actually calculated And with the datatype not known the available operators cannot be adjusted accordingly Therefore if the left operand is a formula the available operators are the same as for Text see Text Operators above and the actual datatype will be determined at run time after the following rules o If either the left or right operand is of type Text then the operator will also be a text operator and the other operand is converted to text if necessary If both operands are of type Number and the selected operator is one which is available for numbers such as one of the normal comparison operators lt gt lt lt gt gt then two operands are compared as numbers 186 If both operands are of type Number but the selected operator i
50. currently on the hosted recipient list that were not recipients of the source job that will be selected in the recipients wizard because they did not fulfill the source job s condition or they only subscribed to the list after the source job was delivered For any subscribers that were recipients of the source job the condition evaluates to false Examining Tracking Events of the Source Job If you select the first of the two choices above to filter for all subscribers that were recipients of the source job then you may optionally choose to examine the tracking events that were collected for the source job to filter further the recipients Note If you use this option of examining the tracking events additional issues need to be considered To enable the option check the With the following tracked behavior checkbox and select one of the available behavior types from the drop down list e Atleast on open up event The condition will be true only for subscribers who did generate at least one open up event for the source job 190 At least one click event for any selected URL The condition will be true only for subscribers who did generate at least one click event for any of the selected URLs see below on how to select the URLs to look at At least one click event for each selected URL The condition will be true only for subscribers who did generate at least one click event for each of the selected URLs see
51. digest e INDEX Will deliver the message to users that receive only a topics index e NOMAIL Will deliver the message to users that currently receive no mail Setting a Condition is a means of creating a subset of recipients from the selected LISTSERV list based on the e mail address or in the case of DBMS backed or LISTSERV hosted lists other information in the lists database table Conditions begin with an ampersand amp followed by the name of the data column header and contain an operator such as equal to or less than lt and finally the value to be assessed For example a LISTSERV list could set the condition of sending mail to all those subscribers who own a dog or cat This condition would look similar to this amp pet dog OR cat Conditions may use parameters that are then filled out by regular users when they define the recipients of e mail jobs The condition in the example above containing parameters could look like this amp pet pet_type OR pet_type The curly brackets are a tag that denotes a parameter name to the system The text inside the brackets is the name of the placeholder that will be replaced by the selection made by the regular user when defining the recipients for a mail job Setting parameters for a LISTSERV condition uses the same process as setting a parameter for an SQL query See Section 18 102 Defining Parameters for furthe
52. drop down menus Figure 109 Recipient Details Using Additional Recipient Data Target Group Definition Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Nost gt Recipients Details Selact the columns in the reopient data containing the e mail address and name Usage of Recipients Data Recipient Identification Column Select the columns that identify the recipients e mail address and name E mel Column EMAR Select the e mail column and the name column from the drop down menus Name Column FAME E toptonal Header Definition Zoe Zenmarman ny 115 Figure 110 Recipient Details Ignoring Additional Recipient Data Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next Recipients Details Select the columns in the recipient data containing the e mail address and name Usage of Recipients Data C Use additional recipient data for mail merging and tracking Ignore additional recipient data and send job as bulk e mail No mail merging possible only blind tracking possible Recipient Identification Columns Select the column that identifies the recipients e mail address and enter the name and address that will appear in the To header E mail Column EMAIL z Select the column for e mail addresses To header information that will be used for all recipients Add n bic Enter a To Name
53. e Announcement List This type of list is used for announcements and newsletters Communication with subscribers is one way stemming from the LISTSERV Maestro sender and going to the subscribers Subscribers are not allowed to post back to the list 29 Figure 24 LISTSERV List Wizard List Type LISTSERY List Definition f Profile Profile Field A aan General Fialdes patailes List Type List Options Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Type Specify if the LISTSERY list will be used for announcements only or if list subscribers may post messages to the list and if the discussion traffic on the list will be moderated Announcement List Select the type of list from the options provided C Unmoderated Discussion List C Moderated Discussion List Click Next gt to continue 7 1 5 List Options for LISTSERV Announcement Lists The List Options screen is divided into tabbed pages General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling and List Archive The last tab List Archive is optional and will not appear unless archives have been set up in the HUB For more information on archives see the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual All list types require that a list administrator called a list owner be set on the General Options tab Enter at least one e mail address that will become the administrator owner of the LISTSERV list
54. ends For the From threshold you have the following choices e The delivery time of the original source job This means that the event period begins with the delivery time of the source job the earliest events generated for the source job will be considered by the condition e lt To be defined during recipient definition gt This means that the beginning of the event period the From threshold is not already fixed here in the target group definition but will instead be supplied by the end user who employs this target group in the recipients wizard The end user will then have the choice to set the From threshold to the same delivery time of the original source job as explained above to catch even the earliest events or to set it to a specific date and time to start event examination at this specific time For the To threshold you have the following choices e The delivery time of the follow up job The follow up job is the job that this target group will be employed for in the recipients wizard This choice means that the event period ends with the delivery time of the follow up job even the latest events generated for the source job will be considered by the condition e lt To be defined during recipient definition gt This means that the end of the event period the To threshold is not already fixed here in the target group definition but will instead be supplied by the end user who employs this target grou
55. equal The condition is true if the two texts are not equal lt Less than The condition is true if the left text is less than the right text lexicographic comparison lt Less than or equal The condition is true if the left text is less than or equal to the right text lexicographic comparison gt Greater than The condition is true if the left text is greater than the right text lexicographic comparison gt Greater than or equal The condition is true if the left text is greater than or equal to the right text lexicographic comparison begins with The condition is true if the left text begins with the text string given as the right operand text ends with The condition is true if the left text ends with the text string given as the right operand text contains The condition is true if the left text somewhere contains the text string given as the right operand text Boolean Operators Available either if the left operand is of the type Boolean or of the type Field where the field in turn has the datatype Boolean The Boolean operators are Equal The condition is true if the two operands have the same Boolean value lt gt Not equal The condition is true if the two operands have different Boolean values Element Operators Available if the left operand is of the type Field where the field in turn has the datatype Single Select The element operators are
56. filled in and their values will appear in gray Fill in the list specific fields 7 Optionally fill in any other list fields 67 8 Click OK New list subscribers that are not dataset members are automatically added to the dataset when they are subscribed to any list in that dataset To add or change information at the dataset level use the Browse Edit Confirmed Members link in the actions menu To add or change information on the list level use the Browse Edit Confirmed Subscribers link in the actions menu 9 3 Modifying Members by Upload Any existing dataset or list can have its current membership modified by the data administrator uploading a file in to the system This is the easiest way to add many members to a dataset or subscribers to a list as well as update data for numerous members and subscribers As with other management tasks the steps for uploading a file to change data for a dataset and to change data for a list follow very similar procedures 9 3 1 The Upload Wizard LISTSERV Maestro uses a wizard to assist the data administrator with modifying the data in an existing dataset or list The wizard is comprised of seven pages that go through the process of modifying the data of an existing dataset or list step by step Depending on the choices made on some wizard pages other pages may become disabled or appear in different versions If a wizard page is disabled it is not necessary with the current selections an
57. for Cut Copy Marks the selected condition node for Copy amp Paste The node is not actually copied until the Paste command is selected at a different location Clear Cut Copy State Aborts any ongoing Cut amp Paste or Copy amp Paste operation that was started with either of the commands Cut or Copy Any previously marked node will become unmarked and the Paste command will no longer be available Delete Deletes the selected condition node after confirmation This is not recoverable Combination Operator Nodes Combination operator nodes derive their Boolean state by examining the Boolean state of all sub nodes and combining these states using a Boolean operator depending on the node s type The following operator node types are available Combine conditions with AND Combines the Boolean states of all sub nodes using the boolean AND operator meaning that the combination is true only if all sub nodes are also true If even a single sub node is false the combination is also false The AND combination is represented in the tree with the symbol and the textual representation AND Combine conditions with OR Combines the Boolean states of all sub nodes using the boolean OR operator meaning that the combination is true if at least one sub node is true no matter if all others are false If all sub nodes are false the combination is also false The OR combination is re
58. for details Examples example this is a text string This string contains quotes which are therefor scaped n this string has three spaces at the beginning and end Standard Merge Field Expressions Restriction Standard merge field expressions are only allowed if the formula is used in one of the following contexts e Inthe condition tree of a Hosted Recipient List target group e Ina Calc system drop in of a job with the recipients type Uploaded CSV text file or LISTSERV Maestro selects from a Database or Target Group if the target group is based on either of the two above or ona Hosted Recipient List If the system drop in is used in a job with a different recipient type the formula must not contain any merge field expressions if it does an error message will appear during test delivery Type Standard merge field expressions can either be of type number or of type text depending on their context and content see the Type Determination below for details Usage To include a standard merge field in a formula type the merge field name enclosed in amp and Only merge field names that are actually defined in the recipient list can be used Examples amp NAME amp STATE amp ACCOUNT_BALANCE Type Determination Whenever a merge field appears in a formula it will first be replaced with the field value for the c
59. form by anyone wishing to join a mailing list Careful consideration of the dataset design will produce user friendly web forms and will collect the types of recipient data that can be used to send personalized and targeted messages to subscribers A link to the dataset web form can be placed on a web site where anyone can fill it out inputting the requested data and then joining any available mailing lists Data collected from the web form is automatically placed in the matching dataset where becomes available for use when sending e mail jobs to subscribers Subscribers and their data can also be added to the dataset directly by the data administrator Managing subscribers and subscriber data is covered in Section 9 1 Managing Members of a Dataset and List Subscribers The recipient dataset screen has two basic functions that are accessed using one of the two tabs at the top Recipient Datasets and Lookup Tables Click on the tab to access each function The Recipient Datasets tab contains a listing of the names of any existing datasets their descriptions and the number of members in each Each dataset name is a link that opens the dataset for editing member management and customization of the web form Figure 3Recipient Datasets Recipient Warehouse This page displays an overview of all recipient datasets and lookup tables in your warehouse Recipient Datasets Lookup Tables This page contains all recipient
60. formula from the first drop down list The second control then becomes a multi line edit field where you now enter the formula to use See below for details about formulas Operator The available operators are shown in the third control of the dialog box which is always a drop down list Which operators are available depends on the type of the left operand For example there are different operators for numbers than for text strings Number Operators Available either if the left operand is of the type Number or of the type Field where the field in turn has the datatype Number The number operators are Equal The condition is true if the two numbers are equal lt gt Not equal The condition is true if the two numbers are not equal lt Less than The condition is true if the left number is less than the right number lt Less than or equal The condition is true if the left number is less than or equal to the right number gt Greater than The condition is true if the left number is greater than the right number gt Greater than or equal The condition is true if the left number is greater than or equal to the right number 184 Text Operators Available either if the left operand is of the type Text or of the type Field where the field in turn has the datatype Text The text operators are Equal The condition is true if the two texts are equal lt gt Not
61. groups that are related to each other The intent of categories is to minimize the time needed to locate a specific target group By selecting a category first users do not need to browse through all the available target groups but only those in the relevant category 118 To add a target group to a category select the category for the target group from the drop down menu To create a new category click the New Category link and define a new category by entering its name into the edit field Target group categories are optional If no category is selected or created target groups are placed into lt No Category gt Figure 113 Target Group Wizard General Target Group Definition General Source Cancel Save amp Exit lt Bact Next gt ganera Type the name of the new category here Enter a target group name and a description Optionally select a category or create a new one web signup form data Name Type in a descriptive name Category Click here to enter add a new category Description Descriptions should assist regular users in selecting the most appropriate target group for their jobs Category lt No Category gt pe Selects NAME AGE GENDER from international database Click Next gt to continue 16 2 Source On the Source screen of a target group where LISTSERV Maestro retrieves the recipients select the database plugin that matches
62. in the message to confirm your membership You will not receive any list mail until you do so My Lists My Profile Subscribed List Name Action Description NEWS FROM Subscribe Join our news list for XYZ customers Breaking news for users and developers such as upgrades and bug fixes will be annoucened here New product release schedules and calls for beta testers will also be distributed TALK BACK TO Subscribe Join our open discussion list for XYZ customers Share your tips and tricks with other users of XYZ software The most creative ideas will be published in our award winning monthly newsletter XYZ Monthly Newsletter Subscribe Join our monthly XYZ Company newsletter and receive special online sales annoucements product reviews money saving coupons and much more LISTSERV Maestro will send a confirmation e mail message to the address used in the membership form A link in the message must be clicked in order for the membership to be confirmed A Confirmation Accepted message will appear once the link is accessed From here a new confirmed member can go to the logon page Figure 76 Confirmed Membership Message Confirmation Accepted Your request to join XYZ Company is hereby confirmed You have been subscribed with the e mail address luckyme75 yahoo com As a member you can to subscribe to any XYZ Company mailing lists To login use your e mail address as given above and the password that yo
63. input boxes Figure 138 Define Recipients Using a Target Group Define Recipients Options Source Source Details Cancel lt Back Next gt Input Yalues for Target Group Parameters Enter values for all parameters of the selected target group City of residence Select 7 Gender Select 7 Age Click Next gt to continue Since all further settings such as header usage and duplicate elimination have already been defined during the creation of the target group the Recipients Details screen is not necessary and there is no Duplicate Elimination item on the Summary screen The Source Details screen will go directly to the Summary screen From there click the Finish button to save the recipient definition for the job and return to the Workflow screen 146 Glossary of Terms Administration Hub HUB A component of the LISTSERV Maestro program that allows the administrator to create user accounts and assign and change settings for the entire application Boolean Field A data field based upon Column A vertical set of data as in a table or spreadsheet Database Plugin Is used to connect LISTSERV Maestro to a database and to allow the user to select recipient data from a database table in the recipient wizard The user selects the matching plugin for the database he she wants to access then provides the connection data like
64. institutions can provide wider opportunities to their recipients for communication The Recipient Warehouse A new functional area within the User Interface called the Recipient Warehouse allows the Maestro data Administrator to create and manage datasets lookup tables lists subscriber pages and target groups Unlike using LISTSERV Maestro to extract recipient data from an external user database using the Recipient Warehouse to manage recipient data requires no specialized database administration knowledge and no SQL coding LISTSERV Maestro manages the data tables used to store the data and it guides the data Administrator when defining target groups Datasets Each dataset contains a table that holds data about each recipient or member of the dataset The data stored for each member is determined by the data Administrator In addition to the e mail field which is mandatory for all members the data Administrator can define other text numeric Boolean true or false and selection fields that can be collected and stored for all the dataset members Each dataset contains one or more lists that members can subscribe to Additional data fields can be added to individual lists The data collected and stored from these fields is associated with individual subscribers on these lists For example the dataset could store the e mail address and name of all its members but subscribers to the Animal Anecdotes list within the d
65. list below contains all fields of type Text or Number Specify whether the subscriber profile value input for the fields will be restricted Field Input Validation Settings FNAME Accept all values z LNAME Accept all values 7 USERNAME String length range x Min B Max 15 SOFTWARE Accept all values z DOB Date with format z mm dd yyyy x Date with format String length range String length minimium String length maximum 13 The Summary screen is the final step in the recipient dataset wizard This screen summarizes the settings of the dataset If the settings of the dataset are not satisfactory use the lt Back button to make any changes Once the dataset is acceptable set the access level using the drop down menu Datasets can have one of three levels of member area access e Open to everyone Anyone can click on the membership area URL and have access to membership area in order to join the area and subscribe to mailing lists e Access for members only Only those who are current members can login and access the membership area e No public access The member area is not open for access to anyone The member area can be temporarily closed for maintenance such as updating the membership list or other tasks by checking the check box labeled Closed for maintenance Closing the member area for maintenance will prevent anyone from joining or existing memb
66. locale or with the SUDSCTIVETiMEMILlis optional parameters Langcode and count rycode to and ToMillis specify your own locale See Time and Date Patterns for details formatpattern Type Text Specifies the format pattern to use to convert the milliseconds value in datevalue into the formatted representation Arguments The following arguments are optional localename Type Text A name of a predefined locale If specified any locale specific text in the formatted date time representation will be given according to this locale Or supply both these arguments langcode Type Text A lowercase two letter ISO 639 language code specifying the language for the locale See for example http ftp ics uci edu pub ietf http related iso639 txt for a list of the SO 639 language codes count rycode Type Text An uppercase two letter ISO 3166 country code specifying the country for the locale See for example http userpage chemie fu berlin de diverse doc ISO_3166 html for a list of the ISO 3316 country codes If langcode and countrycode are specified they are used to create a locale for the given language and country and any locale specific text in the formatted date time representation will be given according to this locale Examples locale for Germany ToDate CurrentMillis ToDate CurrentMillis ToDate CurrentMillis MMM dd yyyy MMM dd yyyy
67. more or less all letters and characters from the most widely used languages as well as a set of symbols and other useful characters LISTSERV Maestro offers Unicode in the form of its UTF 8 variant UTF 8 is a transfer encoding for the 16 bit Unicode charset which maps Unicode characters to one two or more bytes in a way that more common characters like ASCII characters need fewer bytes than uncommon characters Again for convenience the first 128 characters of Unicode 0 127 are exactly the same as in the ASCII charset while the first 256 characters 0 255 are the same as in ISO 8859 1 West European A large percentage of all other letters of world languages are assigned values from 256 to 65535 although not even the large range of Unicode is enough to accommodate all letters from all languages LISTSERV Maestro and International Character Sets What happens when international characters are used in e mail messages written and delivered in LISTSERV Maestro Internally LISTSERV Maestro uses pure Unicode allowing for the mixture of any characters in e mail including the subject line and any data merged from uploaded files or selected from a database as long as there is a way of inputting them For some languages this simply requires the installation of a special keyboard and display driver for that language Other languages such as Asian languages may require a special keyboard this depends on the language and on the co
68. name into the edit field Target group categories are optional If no category is selected or created target groups are placed into lt No Category gt Figure 90 Target Group Wizard General Target Group Definition General Source Cancel Save amp Exit Back Next gt General Type the name of the new category here Enter a target group name and a description Optionally select a category or create a new one Name Type in a descriptive name Category Category web signup Select Existing Category New Category lt No Category gt Click here to enter add a new category Description Descriptions should assist regular users in selecting the most appropriate target group for their jobs Selects NAME USERNAME INDUSTRY from LISTSERV list Talk Back to xv2 Click Next gt to continue 14 2 Source Select the LISTSERV list for the drop down menu Next select the type of message by clicking the option button Send job as standard list message to list members or Send as special list message Standard list messages are sent to the list subscribers just as a normal list posting would be from a list subscriber or editor Bounce reporting is possible The message will be archived if there are list archives and the message will be available for list digests No personalization using mail merging is possible and only blind tracking is available Special list
69. of 100 entries in order to not overburden the user interface and to protect against abuse If more entries than this is required it would probably be better to use the Edit Field type for this parameter and let the end user input the value manually instead of selecting it from a list with too many entries 18 2 4 Parameter Type Date and or Time This parameter type appears as an input box on the end user s screen Choose sub selections for Date Input Format and or Time Input Format Choose at least one or choose both The selection determines whether the user will be asked to input a date a time or both It also determines how the input fields will be arranged Input fields will be rendered as three input fields for the date day month year ordered according to specification and or as two or three input fields for the time hours and minutes with or without seconds according to your specification All end user time input must be in the 24h format from 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 An AM PM input format is not available In addition to defining how the date time input will look for the end user it is also necessary to define how the input from the user is converted into a string that matches the date time format used in the database Do this by entering a format string into the specified edit field In that format string use any desired characters For example separation characters like or Also use any of the format placeholde
70. of the SQL statement that are not yet known can be defined at the moment the SQL statement is entered into the system These placeholders are then replaced with actual values before the statement is executed This behavior is very similar to the use of Drop In Content elements as described in Section 5 1 Drop In Content in the LISTSERV Maestro 1 2 User s Manual Continuing with the example above using placeholders makes it possible to create a parameterized SQL statement that selects all recipients of a certain age range The end user who employs the target group in a recipient definition is left with the decision of what age range to use when creating the recipients definition This example shows how the actual age range values are replaced with placeholders from and to select email name city from recipients where age gt from and age lt to 135 18 1 1 Parameter Placeholders A placeholder is any string of characters that appears between special opening and closing tags By default the opening tag is and the closing tag is Everything surrounded by these two tags will be treated as parameter placeholders and not as part of the actual SQL statement Different tags can be defined if the default tag strings are used somewhere else in the statement and therefore cannot be recognized as placeholder tags Enter different tags in the two edit boxes below the SQL statement input field on the Sou
71. same charset for the mail In summary for the recipient types of an existing LISTSERV list or LISTSERV selecting from a database the merge value characters that have no representation in the charset that was chosen for the mail text will be displayed as a different character whichever character from the actual charset that has the same byte value like A from ISO 8859 1 and A from ISO 8859 7 or may not be displayed at all if there is no corresponding byte value in the charset International Character Set Recipient Names in the Mail TO Header The previous section outlined the problems of mixing a mail text in one language with merge values from a different language As an example an English text mail was described with an international recipient list where the recipient names contain characters from many languages with the languages possibly differing between recipients from different countries The recipient s name as a merge value is probably one of the most common uses for merging fields to be able to merge the recipient s name into the text of the message to personalize the mail If this is done the problems described earlier need to be considered 196 However the recipient s name is also often used in the To header field of the mail so that the mail appears to the recipient with the recipients own name visible in the To field which is usually displayed by the e mail client in some fashio
72. sure that the field s content can be interpreted as a number for all recipients Otherwise the field will have the type text for some recipients which would cause the calculation of the formula to fail so the job itself would fail as well This determination of the type is done during delivery when the merge values of all recipients are known Special Note If the formula used in a Calc system drop in together with recipients based on such a target group then only profile fields which are defined in the hosted recipient list as mandatory are allowed as standard merge field expressions Fields that are defined as optional must use the optional merge field expression instead See next sub section Optional Merge Field Expressions Restriction Optional merge field expressions are only allowed if the formula is used in one of the following contexts e Ina Calc system drop in of a job with the recipients type Uploaded CSV text file or LISTSERV Maestro selects from a Database or Target Group if the target group is based on either of the two above or ona Hosted Recipient List If the system drop in is used in a job with a different recipient type the formula must not contain any merge field expressions if it does an error message will display during test delivery Type Optional merge field expressions can be of the type number or of the type text
73. target group to enable it If left unchecked the target group will not appear in the list of available target groups to regular users 117 Figure 112 Summary for Uploaded Text File Target Group Definition Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Duplicate Elimination Summar Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the settings specified for this target group definition General Information Name Uploaded text file Description File from international database This target group definition meets all requirements necessary for the definition of recipients q M Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group Completed target groups must be enabled so that they can be used in the recipient definition of a mail job Recipients Statistics The recipients will be retrieved Now as defined in this wizard E mail Column EMAIL Name Column FNAME Usage of Recipients Data Used for mail merging and tracking Duplicate Elimination Selected Duplicate Elimination Use my list of columns to determine duplicates Recipients Sample EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demo lsoft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool i 1987 y n y n Xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com
74. target groups to segment mailing lists by incorporating advanced querying features within the LISTSERV Maestro interface 1 4 LISTSERV Maestro Data Administration Interface The opening screen of LISTSERV Maestro s interface contains various sets of functional and navigational icons The top right of each screen in the LISTSERV Maestro interface includes all or a subset of these four icons Table 1 Navigational Icons Home brings the user back to the opening screen the LISTSERV Maestro home page Up One Level brings the user up one level in the program not necessarily back to the previous screen x WY m Log out ends the LISTSERV Maestro session and closes the account P Help provides access to page specific online help LISTSERV Maestro s functionality centers on characterizing the various parts of an e mail job A job refers to all of the elements that make up the creation scheduling delivery and tracking of customized e mail messages Throughout LISTSERV Maestro documentation job and e mail job are used interchangeably and represent the same thing the summation of the multiple functions that make up the definition and distribution of customized e mail messages ae X LISTSERV MAESTRO Figure 1 LISTSERV Maestro Home Page 1 Starts a new e mail job Oj m 2 2 Jobs that have been defined but not ready for delivery e 3 CA 3 Jobs that have been approve
75. the Add Field link For each new field enter the following information 48 e Name The name of the field as it will be used internally by the system for mail merging and querying Field names can only use upper and lower case letters A Z and a z the numbers 0 9 and the underscore _ Spaces and other special characters are not allowed e Display Name The display name is the label that identifies the blank field on the web form The display name will be seen by anyone accessing the list s public subscription page on the Web All alphanumeric characters are permitted as well as spaces and most special characters e Data Type Choose the type of data to be entered in the field from the drop down menu Three different classifications of data are available selection lists are not available for hosted LISTSERV lists Text Text fields can accept any type of text including dates in specific formats such as dd mm yyy or mm dd yyyy Number Number fields accept any whole integers Boolean Boolean fields are based on two states one being true the other false e Mandatory Decide whether the data is mandatory for subscribers to enter into the web form or optional Boolean fields cannot be optional due to the nature of the data type the selection equates to either true or false After list fields are created they can be edited removed moved up or moved down by using the co
76. the data is mandatory for subscribers to enter into the web form or optional Boolean fields cannot be optional due to the nature of the data type the selection equates to either true or false After fields are created they can be edited removed moved up or moved down by using the corresponding links on the right side of the table Figure 6 Recipient Dataset Definition Wizard Profile Fields Recipient Dataset Definition General Profile Fields Profile Field Details Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Shared Dataset Fields Specify the shared dataset fields These fields are shared by all mailing lists in this dataset Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory Rename FNAME First name Text Mandatory Edit Remove LNAME Last name Text Mandatory Edit Remove Use USERNAME Screen name Text Optional Edit Remove these SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional Edit Remove links to DOB Date of birth Text Optional Edit Remove change p existing Check the box to receive HTML HTML formatted mail Leave unchecked for text Boolean n a Edit Remove fields mail Text z Optional Reset Up Remove use this link to add a new field 12 The next screen in the wizard is Profile Field Details The profile field details screen will appear differently depending on the types of data in the dataset Any datas
77. theme can be created ensuring brand recognition and maintaining subscriber confidence and trust The fonts colors and images of the public pages in 85 each LISTSERV Maestro dataset are set with a template that contains style information A new template can be exchanged with the default template in each dataset so that different membership areas can have their own look and feel To upload a new template select the dataset and click Subscriber Access Template from the Actions menu The Upload Access Pages Template screen opens This page displays a sample of the layout and styles used in the default template as a subscriber would see them Use this screen as a guide for changing the styles in a custom template Figure 80 Default Subscriber Access Template Upload Access Pages Template On this page you may change the template used for displaying the subscriber access pages A sample of the current layout is shown below You are currently using the default template Click here to upload a user defined template Sample Access Page Layout This is a sample page to view the layout and styles of the current subscriber pages template Below is a preview of the member area as a subscriber would see it My Lists My Profile Current Category Sample Dataset gt Sample Parent Category gt Sample Category Sub Categories This is the description of the current category which is the Sample Category The text her
78. to describe further the choices regular users have among the different selections available in the target group If there are multiple parameters they can be grouped under headings and their order can be arranged The more description regular users have the easier it will be for them to decide how to use the target groups to select the recipients they want for their e mail jobs 14 5 1 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists with Topics Target groups sending standard list messages to lists with topics expressed as a parameter will only have the single parameter to describe to regular users Figure 97 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists with Topics as a Parameter Target Group Definition c fi Shiri n A cip S o 7 General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview oe ae Summary etails Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Input Layout Specify whether the topics parameter input page will be augmented with an additional heading You may add an optional introductory text to help the user select the correct input value for the topics parameter Topics Parameter Heading Heading Text Operating Systems Topics optional Additional Text This LISTSERV List has three mail topics based on the a optional type of operating system the developer is designing software for Click Next gt to continue 105 14 5 2 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists with Parameters in Conditions Targ
79. true for all subscribers of the hosted recipient list If a node in the tree has sub nodes then the node itself can be either closed hiding the sub nodes or open displaying the sub nodes Closed nodes are displayed with a small B icon and open nodes are displayed with a small B Sicon Click on the icon to open or close close a node double clicking the node name will not work Figure 139 Condition Tree Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Subscriber Condition Supply the condition that determines if a list subscriber shall receive the mail or not Available Fields of List XYZ Monthly Newsletter EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML PRODUCT PERMISSION Text Text Text Text Number Text Boolean Multiple Select Boolean Condition tree Root 2 Subscribers of XYZ Monthly Newsletter AND Combination Operator element man Opens a menu of Actions on Selected Node Child available actions This combination operator evaluates as true if in turn node all its child combination operators and or condition nodes evaluate as true when applied to a subscriber Change Operator Type Add Condition Add Job Based Condition Add Combination Operator Copy Clicking on a node to select it will provide a detailed descript
80. type text They can appear in different shapes which are described in the following sub sections For number type expressions the number can be any integer number in the range 9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807 Floating point numbers are not possible in LISTSERV Maestro formulas The text can be any character string for text type expressions Constant Number Expressions Restriction None Constant number expressions can be used in any formula Type Constant number expressions are as the name implies always of the type number Usage To include a constant number in a formula simply type the number using only the digits 09 do not use as a thousands separator or as a decimal point Negative numbers must have a leading minus sign Examples 1 0 537 lt 17 007 149 Constant Text Literal Expressions Restriction None Constant text literal expressions can be used in any formula Type Constant text literal expressions are as the name implies always of the type text Usage To include a text literal in a formula type the characters desired and denote the beginning and the end of the text literal by enclosing the whole string in quotation marks lt gt There must not be any linebreaks in the text string Since the text literal must be quoted it must also follow the rules for quote escaping See Appendix F Advanced Use of System Drop Ins
81. uploaded file has to be encoded with the ISO 8859 1 encoding The system will try to determine the separator and quote character automatically Specify details manually Header Row Yes the first row in the file contains the headers C No the file does not have a header row Preview fname Iname username software dob html usertype permission betatest zoe maestro dema soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna YVonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro dema lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer i 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Refresh Preview Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with each column of data is separated correctly and labeled with a header row Note In the interest of keeping this document shorter a screen shot of Parse Details for a list is not included If LISTSERV Maestro has not interpreted the data correctly or an unconventional delimiter and or quote character has b
82. use 8 bits they have twice the range as ASCII enough room for 256 characters 0 255 For convenience all ISO 8859 charsets contain the full range of ASCII in their lower 128 characters the bytes 0 127 from any ISO 8859 charset map directly to the corresponding ASCII character making ISO 8859 a superset of ASCII The differences of each ISO charset are in the upper 128 characters the bytes 128 255 For example ISO 8859 1 mapping an alphabet suitable for West European languages has the umlauts A O and U at the positions 196 214 and 220 In comparison ISO 8859 7 mapping the Greek alphabet has the Greek letters A and at the same positions The following charsets from the ISO 8859 family are currently supported by LISTSERV Maestro e 1S0 8859 1 Latin 1 West European e ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 East European e 1S0 8859 3 Latin 3 South European e ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 North European e 1IS0 8859 5 Cyrillic e 1S0 8859 6 Arabic e 1S0 8859 7 Greek 170 e t1IS0 8859 8 Hebrew e 1S0 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish e 1IS0 8859 15 Latin 9 West European update of Latin 1 with some French and Finnish letters that were omitted in Latin 1 plus the Euro currency symbol instead of the international currency symbol 2 e UTF 8 International Unicode encoded in UTF 8 format Unicode is a very large charset with room for almost all characters of many different languages of the world even the many Asian chara
83. used to assemble the Full Name of the list subscriber Select a mandatory single field that contains a valid full name consisting of at least a first name and a last name separated by a space This will be validated during input Alternatively select several fields two of which must be mandatory any remaining fields may be optional that the Full Name can be assembled from by appending the fields in the given order with a separating space between each No additional input validation is required Profile Fields Full Name Fields FNAME lt Mandatory gt LNAME lt Mandatory gt USERNAME lt Optional gt Use the arrows to move the profile fields Move Up into the name fields Move Down column Name Display Name r Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean n a shared field Leave unchecked for text mail USERTYPE Checkthe box if you are a developer Boolean n a Click Next gt to continue 7 1 4 List Type for LISTSERV Announcement List The next screen in the wizard is List type Use the option buttons to select Announcement List
84. will need to select the topic or topics Special list messages will need to select options and decide whether to set conditions that can segment the list based on the existing subscriber data 14 3 1 Standard List Messages with Topics Active LISTSERV lists often use sub groups within the list to give subscribers the opportunity to receive only the posts they are most interested in and not receive all the list mail Sub groups are created in LISTSERV by defining the keyword Topics in the list header If the LISTSERV list was created in LISTSERV Maestro topics are defined on the seventh screen of the list definition wizard Lists can have up to 23 topics List subscribers can elect to receive only those messages that fit into the topic s they are interested in reading Similarly list members can post their messages to only those topics their messages are relevant to if subscribers are allowed to post to the list For example a list could have the general subject of Software Development Topics could be defined by operating system type of software or type of development For more information on Topics see the LISTSERV List Owner s Manual Select the way that topics will be used in the target group definition from these options e Send only to subscribers with the following topics The message will be sent to only to those list subscribers that selected any of the checked list topics Expose the topics as parameters so that regular u
85. wizard and must therefore have the same type Example Assume that the hosted recipient list has a field called AGE and you want to define a target group that selects all subscribers that are of a certain age or older If for example you want to test for the age of 21 you could specify this as a condition node as follows the field AGE gt the number 21 However what if for the next mailing you want to use a different age say 18 or 40 You could of course create a new target group for that purpose with a new condition But this will soon become tedious so instead you should use a parameter for the age and thus leave it to the end user to supply the actual age to check for The condition node would then look like this 189 the field AGE gt the numeric value of the parameter age_param Where age_param is the name that you have given this parameter The resulting target group could then be used to select recipients of any age or older just by supplying the desired threshold age in an edit field as a value for the parameter age_param Job Based Condition Nodes Job based condition nodes derive their Boolean state by examining the delivery of an earlier mail job the so called source job and optionally also the tracking events collected for that job if any The condition node is represented in the tree with the symbol and a textual representation that displays the condition in short form
86. y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demao lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Click Next gt to continue fip Removing duplicates from recipient data can be a useful way to ensure that multiple messages are not sent to the same recipient It is common practice for one person to have more than one e mail address for example a work e mail address and a personal e mail address By creatively selecting one or more criteria to remove duplicates it is possible to avoid sending multiple messages to the same person with different e mail addresses Similarly several recipients may use the same e mail address for example family members sharing an ISP may also share an e mail address In this case it might be desirable to send multiple messages to the same address shared by multiple recipients but addressed to each individual using the e mail account 16 8 Summary The Summary screen displays
87. 129 V7 Gomera sesso E T ob A E E E E E E 129 17 2 SOURCE aiana a e e a a a a A a a a a a 129 V7 3 mee E E E E E E E E E A E E See ee 130 17 4 Input Layout arnan a a e bah a a a aa aa aa dan aa iei 131 TZO Mpui POO e lade ee Ses Oi na on chee ebb eed r nen clea r r e ee edad 132 17 6 Recipients Details sis cci ceect eters aida pect stene sev io e a o E E aa o ea an E oai 133 ETa E EE E E T E E E E E E 133 Section 18 Defining Parameters ccseesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeesneeeeeeeesneeesseeeeseeesseeeeseeesseeeseeeesessaeeaseeeeenseeseenenes 135 18 1 Fixed and Parameterized SQL StateMent eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeesaeeeeseaeeeseneeeeneeeeeeaaes 135 18 1 1 Parameter Placeholders anii cc csteecssds vee ctecanes shecdaesstne gene aatee Se gctensetedcneebeedeeeseupoch estes deeedece eteceeseneceneeteecreesees 136 18 2 Available Parameter Types i240 esses ee ined a Eea E ee ees onde E ELA ATN CEE EET NERE ENa TERET 137 18 2 1 Parameter Type Checkbox noinid iia aidaa ieie CE adeat aidaa iiaei 138 182 2 Parameter Type Edit Field oi irrena neay e a aE EE E E A a a 138 18 2 3 Parameter Type Selection List 2 c cc cc cee tee tee iiniu iiie 139 18 2 4 Parameter Type Date And or Time 0 ee eeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeenneeeeneaeeesnaeeeenneeeenead 142 Section 19 Using Enabled Target Groups in the Recipients Wizard ccsseceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenee
88. 7 Target Groups from a Database Accessed by LISTSERV This target group type is based on the recipients type Let LISTSERV Select Recipients from a Database as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a job Multiple screens take the data administrator through the process of defining a recipient target group using LISTSERV to select recipients from a database LISTSERV Maestro to select recipients from a database 17 1 General The General screen in the wizard defines the name category and description of the target group Both name and description are mandatory Enter a meaningful name and a good description so the regular users who are selecting target groups in the recipients wizard will have all the information they need to decide which target group to use Target groups can be clustered in categories making it easier for regular users to select a target group A category is meant to contain target groups that are related to each other The intent of categories is to minimize the time needed to locate a specific target group By selecting a category first users do not need to browse through all the available target groups but only those in the relevant category To add a target group to a category select the category for the target group from the drop down menu To create a new category click the New Category link and define a new category by entering its name into the edit field Target group categories are o
89. 90 12 3 The Recipient Target Group Wizard 2 c cescscetsscencstseceheetuectenseoecdbentgeseeesscedunecteeeesscoeeddeantenestdettneebeedennsieess 91 Section 13 Hosted Recipient List Target Groups ccsecsseeeseeeeeseeeeseeenseeeeseeeaseeeeseeeaseeeseeeeaseeeseeeeaseeeseasasneeaseene 92 TSsA General E E beeadce heeded ached hata ss peeks late ebb cba OSs A cade ceed dee E E E as 92 13 2 SOUPCCiiveckaetciasin i a Mista aoe Sieben einen ea A Toe aed easel abate 93 13 3 Source Detalls isis iiss a a esbce atbacealabelagelada ht R a a geste Coe eel it ta ed alba 94 TSA EZET ANTE E RA NE E AEO TEE A A E OAE N E A E A TET enndansatssouas sabes eappveneas ieee 96 135 Input Layouticu cca Gok ee a Ge aed Me OS acs i a a eae 96 13 6 INPUT PrEVIOW ya cs tis ceces E conte satan obgcneuesd sage A E AE T A EEE E a E EA EET A 97 1327 S MMaAN k a a i acted a a a babii athe sida ladda t a EE S 98 Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups s ccsseesseesseeeeeeeenseeeeseeeaseeeeseeeaseeenseasaseeeaseesaseeeseasaseeeaseaenees 98 14 1 G n ral irisa a a a a tuner ati idee ate dl Shade ee Sane nen Sat 98 KESTON Ke E EE E E E E E T E E E R 99 14 3 Source Detalls ninani nii a i e a o E a o i a a oa 100 14 3 1 Standard List Messages with TOpICS 0 0 eeeeceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeesaeeeseeeaeeeenieeeeennaeeesiieeeenieeeenead 100 14 3 2 Special List Messages nannini n Sea bev gs cen dal E a Tea dong chev nibs A e a ai 102
90. A standard list posting is a normal e mail message sent to the list with no mail merging Standard list messages can be received in a digest form and can be viewed in the list archives if archives have been created for the list Standard list messages limit the type of available tracking to blind tracking only 45 7 2 7 Topics for Unmoderated Discussion Lists Large active LISTSERV lists often use sub groups within the list to give subscribers the opportunity to receive only the posts to the list they are most interested in reading Sub groups are created in LISTSERV by defining the keyword Topics in the list header Lists can have up to 23 topics defined in the header List subscribers can elect to receive only those messages that fit into the topic s they are interested in reading Similarly messages can be posted only to specific topics For example a large list could have the general subject of XYZ Software Topics could be defined by the types of users of the software the type software purchased the tips and tricks for using the software For more information on Topics see the LISTSERV List Owner s Manual To define a new topic simply click the New Topic link and fill out the empty topic row that appears In the list topics are displayed either in the display mode or in the editable mode In the display mode each topic has an associated Edit link to set it into the editable mode In the editable mode each topic has the associat
91. Description XYZ Customer Center Members 36 0 yet unconfirmed Open to everyone Encoding West European ISO 1 Shared Fields EMAIL FNAME Text Text LNAM Text USERNAME Text E SOFTWARE DOB Number Fields formatted in bold are mandatory fields which the member HTM Text Boo Edit Dataset Settings Create Hosted Recipient List Create Hosted LISTSERY List Create Category Browse Edit Confirmed Members Add Single Member Modify Members by Upload Download all Members cer Subscriber Access URLs Subscriber Access Template Delete Dataset To perform an action on subscribers to a list in the dataset first select the dataset and then select the list Click the Actions link in the right corner to open the actions menu Figure 60 Manage List Subscribers Recipient Dataset Details XYZ Monthly News XYZ Company r DEVELOP XYZ List Details ERONATA List Name NEWS FROM XYZ P TALK BACK TO XY Description Annoucement list for XYZ users and developer Edit List Details 36 0 yet unconfirmed Open to everyone Classic LISTSERV Announcement List Subscribers List Type Browse Edit Confirmed Subscribers Add Single Subscriber Modify Subscribers by Upload Fields in this List Download all Subscribers EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB Cut Text Text Text Text Number Text Dele
92. E STATE IN statesel AND EMAIL TYPE h AND 1 OR EMAIL TYPE t AND text 1 AND AGE BETWEEN AND Parameter Details Parameter statesel The label appears to the end user to identify what input is required Label State Fee f A description can appear after Description State of residence optional the input to assist the end user Input Type Selection List Multiple Values Select the type of input that appears to the regular user Text in Selection List Internal Parameter Value Entries have to be Delaware DE Save Entry added manuall because LISTSERV arizona Maestro has no Arkansas ae connection Saarna Use these links to add and delete j Connecticut entries as well as move them up or down Once a label and an optional description have been entered select the input type of the parameter There are four different types of input for parameters check box edit field selection list and date and or time Click Next gt to continue 17 4 Input Layout The Input Layout screen allows the data administrator to design how the recipient target group appears to regular users Heading and additional screen text can be added to describe further the choices regular users have among the different selections available in the target group If there are multiple parameters they can be grouped under headings and their order can be arranged The more description regular users have the eas
93. EEEEE 176 tableframe lgoweclse COlOes BSSSAYS p border style solid border width lpx lpx lpx IPX subscribeStepActiveTitle font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif FONES SZEREN font weight bold background color 333399 color FFFFFF subscribeStepInactiveTitle font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif rome Siwy Sary background color 333399 color FFFFFF description subscribed font weight bold color 009900 notsubscribed selectedTab font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif PONE S LASE oes font weight bold background color 333399 color FFFFFF tableThickFrame porder color SOS oy border style solid border width 4px 3px 3px 3px 177 tableBottomLine border color border style border width tableRightLine border color border style border width 333399 Solid Opx Opx lpx Opx 333399 SKOLakle Opx lpx Opx Opx 178 Appendix E Building Hosted Recipient Queries LISTSERV Maestro includes its own method of build queries from hosted recipient lists by using target groups Basic or complex queries can be created to segment filter a hosted recipient list based on any available data Filtering conditions are entirely optional If no condition is supplied the target group will always address all current subscribers of
94. Existing Category Category lt No Category gt 7 Click here to enter add a new category Description Descriptions should assist regular users in selecting the most appropriate target group for their jobs Selects NAME AGE GENDER from hosted recipient list XYZ Newsletter Click Next gt to continue 13 2 Source The Source screen displays all the datasets in the Recipient Warehouse Select the dataset and the list to retrieve the recipients from To open a dataset click on the plus sign If there are categories within the dataset click on the plus sign to expand the category to see the available lists 93 Figure 84 Target Group Wizard Source for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Source Select the mailing list to retrieve your recipients from e Recipient Warehouse List Details Ate f me coit international Minc Name LISTSERV at Work E Employee News os Z Listserv at Work Description LISTSERV at Work Newsletter Training News O PetsMart Company cme Widget Company Click Next gt to continue 13 3 Source Details The Source Details screen can be used to segment the list s subscribers by setting conditions to pull certain recipients from the list Conditions are based on the fields of data in the datas
95. Fields This page allows you to map the columns of your uploaded file to the fields defined in the dataset Please map all mandatory dataset fields to corresponding file columns to supply the required data for the recipients you want to modify in the dataset These are extra columns in the file Mandatory fields EMAIL Y FNAME LNAME y HTML v that will be ignored by the system Optional fields USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB email fname Iname username software dob html usertype permission betatest feman username S pLNAME zl userName z ame A lt ionore gt A lt ignore gt zi lt ionore gt z zoe maestro demo lsoft com Seat Zimmerman zimmy 1982 1979 1974 Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer Ron maestro demo soft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n Xavier maestro demo lsoft com USERNAME xero no way 2 1970 y y n y Wilfred maestro demo lsoft com o aa Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y vVanna maestro demo lsoft com aus VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demo lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n 1 y y Y Y 3 y Y n n 4 n n n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways field not mapped v field is mapped field is mapped to more than one file column Note In the interest of keeping this d
96. GE 2004 10 ToDate CurrentTimeMillis MM dd yyyy HH mm See here for a detailed description of formulas and functions Note Formulas may also contain parameter placeholders which allows for the definition of conditions with formulas where one or several values in the formula are not known at the time the formula and condition are written but are instead supplied later by the end user who uses this target group in the recipients wizard See here for details about how to include parameters in formulas and read the following sub section about condition parameters in general 188 Parameters in Conditions Parameters can be used in conditions as the right operand in situations where the value of the operand is not yet known at the time the condition is defined or will not be fixed by the condition definition but will be supplied later by the end user when the target group is used in the recipients wizard Using this method can create conditions that are parameterized to allow for greater flexibility for the end user To define a right operand of this type select the entry the TYPE_VALUE supplied for the parameter from the drop down list at fourth position where TYPE_VALUE will be filled out according to the type of the left operand field selected which will therefore also already define the type of the parameter The entry in the drop down list will be one of the following e The text supplied for the parameter
97. Hosted LISTSERY List Encoding West European ISO 1 Create Category Shared Fields Browse Edit Confirmed Members EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML Sd single Memuer Text Text Text Text Number Text Boolean Modify Members by Upload Download all Members Fields formatted in bold are mandatory fields which the member must fil out Subscriber Access URLs Subscriber Access Template Delete Dataset s m 7 1 Creating LISTSERV Announcement Lists Similar to creating a dataset and creating a hosted recipient list creating a hosted LISTSERV list is accomplished by using a wizard that details all the steps of designing the list and the accompanying web subscription form The hosted LISTSERV list definition wizard is comprised of eight main screens The settings available in the wizard vary depending on the type of LISTSERV list that is created A LISTSERV announcement list permits communication to run in one direction from the sender of the message to the subscribers Subscribers are not allowed to post back to the list although they can send mail back to the sender of the message Subscribers are however allowed to manage their own subscription settings based on the features of the list itself 7 1 1 General Setting for LISTSERV Announcement List The first screen General defines the general information pertaining to the list e Name This is the name of the
98. L Soft Sweden AB Softy Data Administrator s Manual LISTSERV Maestro version 2 0 LISTSERV MAESTRO Last updated 09 14 2005 This page is intentionally blank Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted L Soft International Inc does not endorse or approve the use of any of the product names or trademarks appearing in this document Permission is granted to copy this document at no charge and in its entirety provided that the copies are not used for commercial advantage that the source is cited and that the present copyright notice is included in all copies so that the recipients of such copies are equally bound to abide by the present conditions Prior written permission is required for any commercial use of this document in whole or in part and for any partial reproduction of the contents of this document exceeding 50 lines of up to 80 characters or equivalent The title page table of contents and index if any are not considered to be part of the document for the purposes of this copyright notice and can be freely removed if present Copyright 2004 L Soft Sweden AB All Rights Reserved Worldwide L SOFT LISTSERV LSMTP and ListPlex are registered trademarks of L Soft international Inc LMail is a trademark of L Soft international Inc CataList and EASE are service marks of L Soft internationa
99. Member Profile Each e mail address is a clickable link that opens the profile page for that member Click on the e mail address of the member to be edited Enter the new data in the profile fields then click OK to save the new data and return to the previous screen Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving the new data Click Delete to delete the member from the dataset Member profiles will contain only those fields that belong to the dataset Subscriber profiles will contain the member profile in the top part of the screen with the values grayed out and the list specific fields below It is possible to edit the member profile from the list profile screen by clicking the Edit link located on the upper right see Figure 64 63 Figure 63 Edit Dataset Member Edit Member Dataset Specific Fields Here you can change the general values of the member with the e mail address Anna maestro demo soft com for the recipient dataset XYZ Company E Mail Address Firstname Fields with asterisks cannot be left blank anna Last name Screen name Number of XYZ products currently owned Date of birth Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Leave unchecked for text mail j7 Values marked with an asterisk lt gt are mandatory Anna maestro demo soft com Anchor battle ship blues Enter the new data in the appropriate 4 field s and click OK is72 Deletes the membe
100. RCE AGE EMAIL_TYPE FROM mae_recipients WHERE STATE IN statesel AND EMAIL _TYPE h AND html 1 OR EMAIL _TYPE t AND text 1 AND AGE BETWEEN minage AND maxage Parameters Name Label statesel State minage Age between Mmaxage and html HMTL mail text Text mail Recipients Details E mail Column EMAIL Name Column USERNAME Mail Merge Columns FNAME LNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML BETATEST Click Finish to complete the target group and return to the Recipient Target Groups screen 134 Section 18 Defining Parameters Parameters are the placeholders within the SQL statement that are replaced with values chosen by a regular user during the recipient definition of the job By using parameters the data administrator can use the same basic SQL statement for many jobs turning over the details to the regular user who can use them without having to know anything about the actual SQL that lies behind the target group or even know SQL in general This saves time and effort for all team members It also allows group members to share the same target groups while permitting each target group to create different recipient definitions for individual jobs 18 1 Fixed and Parameterized SQL Statements A SQL statement for a target group can be a fixed statement or a parameterized statement A fixed statement contains SQL code that is fixed meaning that it will be used in the same f
101. SQL statement Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing SQL Statement select EMAIL ADDRESS _NAME 1 NAME GENDER AGE CITY EMAIL TYPE FROM MAE RECIPIENTS where EMAIL TYPE h AND html 1 OR EMAIL TYPE t AND text 1 Parameter Details Parameter html Label HTML Description Check which type s of recipients to include optional These values are the values Checkbox Sidi in the database representing Input Type checkbox z the states on and off Value for checked checkbox state 1 Here on equals and r 4 will receive mail and off Value for unchecked checkbox state 0 equals 0 and will not receive mail Figure 129 Parameter Type Checkbox End User s View Define Recipients Options Source Source Details Summary Cancel lt Back Next gt Input Yalues for Target Group Parameters Enter values for all parameters of the selected target group HTML M Check which type s of recipients to include Text 7 you must select at least one of HTML or text otherwise no recipients will be selected 18 2 2 Parameter Type Edit Field This parameter type appears as a free input field on the end user s screen The input is validated according to the sub selection Restrict value s to integer numbers Only integer numbers are accepted as input 138 e Restrict value s to floating point nu
102. The given date and time are 2001 07 04 12 08 56 local time in that time zone Date and Time Pattern Result vyyy MM dd G at HH mm ss z 2001 07 04 AD at 12 08 56 PDT EEE MMM d yy Wed Jul 4 01 h mm a 12 08 PM Mh Totrolock ay 2277 12 o clock OM Pacific Daylight Time K mm a z 0 08 PM PDT vyyyy MMMMM dd GGG hh mm aaa 02001 July 04 AD 12 08 PM EEE d MMM yyyy HH mm ss Z Wed 4 Jul 2001 12 08 56 0700 yyMMddHHmmss2Z 010704120856 0700 166 Appendix B About Comma Separated Files The term comma separated format or tab separated format or CSV is often used as a catchall term for all kinds of text based data formats where the data is formatted in a line by line fashion Each line contains one data record and a number of columns per line where the different columns are separated by comma or tab or some other separator character LISTSERV Maestro can correctly interpret comma separated text files in various formats as long as the following rules are applied e Any character may be used as the separator character although a comma tab or semicolon is conventional e The same separator character must be used in all lines for the entire file e All lines in the file must have the same number of columns which means the same number of separator characters e Empty columns may be created in order that t
103. This information will be used by regular users to locate and identify the target groups they want to use for jobs Both name and description are mandatory Enter a meaningful name and a good description so the regular users who are selecting target groups in the recipients wizard will have all the information they need to decide which target group to use Target groups can be clustered in categories making it easier for regular users to select a target group A category is meant to contain target groups that are related to each other The 109 intent of categories is to minimize the time needed to locate a specific target group By selecting a Category first users do not need to browse through all the available target groups but only those in the relevant category To add a target group to a category select the category for the target group from the drop down menu To create a new category click the New Category link and define a new category by entering its name into the edit field Target group categories are optional If no category is selected or created target groups are placed into lt No Category gt Figure 104 General for Uploaded Text File Target Group Definition General Source Cancel Save amp Exit Next gt General Type the name of the new category here Enter a target group name and a description Optionally select a category or create a new one Name Type in a descriptive name Category
104. Type Number The first argument to find the minimum of arg2 Type Number The second argument to find the minimum of Further arguments are optional arg3 Type Number The third argument to find the minimum of argN Type Number The N argument to find the minimum of Examples Min 13 2 Min 17 amp VALUE 4 17 Pow Function Returns the value of the first argument raised to the Return Type Number power of the second argument Pow base exp Arguments base Type Number The base argument exp Type Number The exponent argument Examples Pow 2 8 Pow amp BASE amp EXPONENT 156 Random Function Returns a pseudo random number in a range Return Type Number specified by the argument Random thresh No argument given The range is from 0 to the largest possible old number value One argument given The range is from 0 to the value of the given argument minus one i e 0 to arg 1 Arguments The argument is optional threshold Type Number The threshold value for the random number The random number will range from 0 to threshold 1 Examples Random Random 6 Random amp MAX_RANDOM Random amp VALUE 17 amp MAX SubscribeTimeMillis Function Returns the time at the s
105. Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro dema lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Click Finish to complete the target group and return to the Recipient Target Groups screen Section 16 Target Groups from a Database Accessed by LISTSERV Maestro This target group type is based on the recipients type Select Recipients from a Database as available in the recipients wizard during recipient definition of a job Multiple screens take the data administrator through the process of defining a recipient target group using LISTSERV Maestro to select recipients from a database 16 1 General The General screen in the wizard defines the name category and description of the target group Both name and description are mandatory Enter a meaningful name and a good description so the regular users who are selecting target groups in the recipients wizard will have all the information they need to decide which target group to use Target groups can be clustered in categories making it easier for regular users to select a target group A category is meant to contain target
106. aeeeeneeeeeeaeeenaeeeenieeeeneaa 114 15 43 Header D finition s zee 205 sche opted a a a e a aa e a aE raa raae aiea vars ceeetiatzsbete 115 15 O Duplicate Elimination aa a a ar paa a eens sauteed ae ara pana a AEAEE aeai 116 15 6 SUMMAN angine a a a a e a a eden eden 117 Section 16 Target Groups from a Database Accessed by LISTSERV Maestro ccsseeccesseeeeesseeeeessseeeeeseees 118 16 1 Generalisstsgiiia a a aa a See ee Seas eae ed i aaa 118 IKEAS OUl Le E E A A E E E A E T 119 16 39 Par meters nen n e a a a a e a a hs lel eee A 120 164s Input Layout EEEE IE EE A E E E EE E E E aa stents ds E TEE 121 16 5 IMput PrEVIEW toesien e ead Sd at at cede pe aaa aa aaae aa 122 16 6 RECIPIENTS Details isprekidana pepene ia iep age sveanbye dqwaga codalvallt prescient sodewn keriari piraan 123 16 6 4 Usage of Recipients Dates sje sctticdee Gena cibdnedon e Mod dude vee ae e lene idee eee Pa 123 16 6 5 Recipient Identification COIUMIS ee ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeneeeeesaeeeseeeaeeeenneeeeeeaesenaeeeenieeeeneaa 124 16 6 6 Header Definitio Nim sssrini ninne een teed agian deh a e 124 16 7 Duplicate Elimination nasan a a a A a aaea E A E aN RE EE a EE E aa a 125 16 8 SUMMARY Cressing kopania upaa bed braces aeea cence dc hewtyaues tes abeph ae weeneese a aeaa panee KETE tee eeuens 126 Section 17 Target Groups from a Database Accessed by LISTSERV ccssseeeseseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeenseeeeeas
107. afiliated with as criteria for segmenting a mail job Industry Computing Data Processing 7 Industry subscribers are affiliated with Accounting Advertising Agriculture Fishing Armed Services Banking Financial Insurance Civil Service Local Government a Communications Construction Education Engineering 97 13 7 Summary The Summary screen displays the target group definition listing conditions and parameters In order for regular users to access the target group it must be enabled Check the box next to Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group to enable it If left unchecked the target group will not appear in the list of available target groups to regular users Figure 89 Target Group Wizard Summary for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the target group definition General Information Name Copy of L Soft at Work Category L Soft Description L Soft at Work recipients This target group definition meets all requirements that are necessary for the definition of recipients V Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group Condition EMPLOYER industry AND OWNER true Parameters industry Industry Industry subscribers are affiliated with
108. ail or not Available Fields of List LISTSERV at Work EMAIL PULL NAME FMPLOYER JOBDESC SITE Text Text Single Select Text Boolean OWNER Boolean EDITOR Boolean Subscribers of LISTSERV at Work AND Combination Operator EN AND Actions on Selected Node ee Th Binat t luates as true if in turn all it z is combinatio gperator evaluates as true if in turn all its EMPLOYER industry child combination operators and or condition nodes evaluate as OWNER true true when applied to a Change Operator Type Add Condition Add Job Based Condition Add Combination Operator Cut Combination Operator Copy Combination Operator Condition in text form EMPLOYER industry AND OWNER true Delete Click Next gt to continue 95 13 4 Parameters The Parameters screen only becomes active if there are parameters in the target group Click on each condition to define the parameter label and description This text will appear on the screens regular users access when employing the target group for a recipient definition Figure 86 Target Group Wizard Parameters for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameters Enter the necessary details for each of the parameters
109. ailable Parameter Types for Select Statements Available Parameter Integer values Integers values Non integer values Non integer values Types outside any inside an quoted outside any in quoted inside an in clause in clause clause in clause Check Box X X Edit field single value X X Edit field multiple values X X Selection list single value X X Selection list multiple X X values Date and or time X 137 18 2 1 Parameter Type Checkbox This parameter type appears as a checkbox on the end user s screen The checkbox has two associated values one for the checked state and one for the unchecked state Enter these values accordingly they need to be different values Depending on the input from the user if the box is checked or not one or the other value will be used directly to replace the parameter placeholder If the parameter placeholders were not quoted then only integers can be entered as the two values If the parameter placeholders were quoted then any string can be entered for the values and all occurrences of the quote character in these will be escaped automatically before the replacement Remember do not escape quotes when entering the values Figure 128 Parameter Type Checkbox Data Administrator s View Parameters Enter the necessary details including input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the
110. ails Duplicate Elimination Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Duplicate Elimination To avoid sending double messages to the same recipient use this page to remove duplicates from your recipient data Duplicate Elimination Options Do not remove duplicates C Remove duplicates with the same e mail address Use my list of columns to determine duplicates FNAME LNAME Recipient Sample FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro dema lsoft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demo lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Click Next gt to continue 15 6 Summary The Summary screen displays all the selections for the target group definition In order for regular users to access the target group it must be enabled Check the box next to Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this
111. ails Elimination Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Finish General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Summary This page summarizes the settings specified for this target group definition General Information Name Recipients in selected states with email preference and age range Category Sample database for Widgets Description Specify one or more states of residence for which you want to select recipients the email type preference HTML and or text and an age range Fields are EMAIL FIRSTNAME FULLNAME MODELNO PET OWN_OR_RENT NEWS_SOURCE AGE EMAIL_TYPE This target group definition meets all requirements that are necessary for the definition of recipients Re heced e aa Completed target groups must be enabled so that they can be used in the recipient definition of a mail job M Yes allow the defi SQL Statement and Parameters SQL Statement SELECT EMAIL_ADDRESS AS EMAIL F_NAME A3 FIRSTNAME FNAME L_NAME AS FULLNAME INTEREST AS MODELNO INTEREST2 AS PET INTEREST4 AS OWN_OR_RENT INTERESTS AS NEWS_SOURCE AGE EMAIL_TYPE FROM mae_recipients WHERE STATE IN statesel AND EMAIL_TYPE h AND html 1 OR EMAIL_TYPE t AND text 1 AND AGE BETWEEN minage AND maxage Parameters Name Label statesel State minage Age between Maxage and html HTML text Text Recipients Statistics The recipients will be retrieved During recipi
112. alia Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Austria Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Azerbaijan Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Bahamas Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Bahrain Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Bangladesh Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Barbados Edit Delete Move Up Move Down 4 1 3 Editing Existing Datasets Once you have an existing datasets in a warehouse their settings can be fully edited until there are lists or members added to them After lists or members become part of a dataset only limited editing capabilities are available To edit the settings of an existing dataset click on the dataset name A split screen will appear showing the dataset and any lists in the left frame and the dataset information in the right frame Click on the Actions link in the right corner to open a menu of actions that can be performed on the dataset The top menu item Edit Dataset Settings will open the recipient dataset wizard so its settings can be changed If there are members or mailing lists in the dataset only the following settings can be changed the name of the dataset the list administrator e mail address the public description field names the access level of the membership area and the closed for maintenance check box Section 5 Introduction to Hosted Mailing Lists Once there are defined datasets in the warehouse mailing lists can be created for each dataset Datasets with many lists can use categories and sub categories t
113. alues No keep values of manually changed members Remove from Dataset No Details Available For modifying lists the following details are available Modification Type Type Details Available Add to List select the desired option button If the new subscriber is not yet part of the dataset Add as new dataset member Adds the subscriber to the dataset and the list Ignore subscriber row Skips the row in the data file and does not add the subscriber to the dataset or the list Update in List select the desired option button for each of the two sets of alternatives The Update may be applied to List and dataset values All changes to both the dataset and the list will be accepted List values only Changes in the list will be accepted and any changes to the dataset will be ignored Overwrite Manual Changes If subscribers have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded values No keep values of manually changed subscribers 71 Modification Type Type Details Available Synchronize with List select the desired option button for each of the three sets of alternatives If the new subscriber is not yet part of the dataset Add as new dataset member Adds the subscriber to the dataset and the list Ignore subscriber row Skips the row
114. an be used In the latter case the number will first be converted into a text before the operator or function is applied For this conversion the number value is simply converted into the corresponding string representation for example the number 157 becomes the text string 157 Formula Functions The following tables describe the functions that are available for use in LISTSERV Maestro formulas Abs Function Returns the absolute value of the given number Return Type Number argument Abs arg Arguments arg Type Number The argument whose absolute value is to be determined Examples Abs 10 Abs amp VALUE Abs 30 amp ACCOUNT 2 CurrentMillis Function Returns the current time in milliseconds since Return Type Number Jan 1 1970 00 00 00 GMT CurrentMillis Arguments None Examples CurrentMillis 154 IndexOf Function Searches for an appearance of the text Return Type Number searchtext in the given text Returns the zero based index of the first appearance of searchtext or 1 if none was found Optionally a zero based start index can be specified with the effect that the search in text will not start at the beginning of text but at the character position specified by startindex Arguments text Type Text T
115. announcement only lists that will be segmented in different target groups and that do not require extra features handled by LISTSERV A special interface is available for defining target groups that guides the user step by step without requiring any SQL knowledge The Hosted Recipient Lists are also the only type of list that supports Selection fields Only LISTSERV Maestro can be used to send to Hosted Recipient Lists Hosted LISTSERV Lists provide a database back end for a traditional LISTSERV list Using Hosted LISTSERV Lists provides the features that are available in LISTSERV such as discussion lists message archives digests automatic bounce processing and the ability to send to the list from a normal e mail client as an alternative to using the Maestro User Interface Subscriber Pages LISTSERV Maestro creates Web pages containing forms where subscribers can enter their own data and manage their own subscriptions The default subscriber pages are generated automatically when the data Administrator creates a dataset and chooses for the dataset to be visible No HTML coding or CGI scripting required System Drop In Content Elements Powerful advanced features for segmenting mailing lists and personalizing content have been added with a feature called System Drop ins Acting like regular drop ins system drop ins use predefined opening and closing tags and must be enabled in the content of a message However system drop in
116. ar users Use this screen to check the appearance of the target group and make selections that are run against the data Use the lt Back button to return to the Input Layout screen to make changes Figure 99 Input Preview for LISTSERV Lists with Topics Target Group Definition Recipients Details Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Input Preview This page shows a preview of the parameter input page as it will be displayed during a recipient definition based on this target group Verify that the layout is satisfactory If not return to the previous pages to change the settings Operating Systems Topics This LISTSERV List has three mail topics based on the type of operating system the developer is designing software for Topics Rieter Operating system topics 106 Figure 100 Input Preview for LISTSERV List with Conditions Target Group Definition Recipient General Source Source Details Parameters Input Layout Input Preview a a Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Input Preview This page shows a preview of the parameter input page as it will be displayed during a recipient definition based on this target group Verify that the layout is satisfactory If not return to the previous pages to change the settings Software Development Software project add It Up atu e Enter the softw
117. arameter highlighted or not to select it Fill out the parameter s initial definition or edit an existing definition in the lower part of the screen The definition of the parameters made here will affect the choices that the end user will have when using this target group in the recipients wizard For more information on creating parameters and the different parameter types see Section 18 Defining Parameters 104 Figure 96 Parameters in Conditional Expressions Target Group Definition E 7 z Recipient General Source Source Details Parameters Input Layout Input Preview annn Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameters Click the parameter link in the conditional expression to select the parameter for editing Enter the input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the conditional expression Conditional Expression cHTML tye Parameter Details Parameter type Label Check the box for HTML conter Description Mail willbe sent in HTML format SS optional Input Type Edit Field Single value Edit Field Single Value Date and or Time put allow free text input x Selection List Single Value Click Next gt to continue 14 5 Input Layout The nput Layout screen allows the data administrator to design how the recipient target group appears to regular users Heading and additional screen text can be added
118. are project being developed X Select HTML Messaging Add It Up Use the drop down menu to select the data Where Am I 5 aaa Check for HTML mail M play iti to fulfill the first condition Author Author Write heck or uncheck box for the saccade onanii Click Next gt to continue 14 7 Recipients Details The Recipients Details screen displays a view and in some cases allows for the addition of details about the recipients In the case of hosted LISTSERV lists no further data needs to be supplied and this screen is for informational purposes Figure 101 Recipient Details for Hosted LISTSERV Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters Input Layout Input Preview amena Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Recipients Details This page displays a list of the columns you may use for mail merge Recipient Identification Columns E mail Column TO Name Column FULL_NAME Additional Mail Merge Columns The following columns may be used for mail merging Merge Columns FNAME LNAME USERNAME All of these columns can be used as bon mail merge variables in the message body HTML BETATEST Click Next gt to continue For LISTSERV lists not hosted by LISTSERV Maestro where mail merging is set in the list header and the list is DBMS backed additional recipient fields can be added in the edit box one
119. as been made to ensure that this document is an accurate representation of the functionality of LISTSERV Maestro As with every software application development continues after the documentation has gone to press so small inconsistencies may occur We would appreciate any feedback on this manual Send comments by e mail to MANUALS LSOFT COM The following documentation conventions have been used in this manual e Quotations from the screen will appear in italics enclosed within quotation marks e Clickable buttons will appear in bold e Clickable links will appear in bold e Directory names commands and examples of editing program files will appear in Courier New font e Emphasized words or phrases will be underlined e Hyperlinks actual or fictitious will be underlined unless they are part of a screen shot or direct quotation from the screen Some screen captures have been cropped and annotated for emphasis or descriptive purposes fip The Tip symbol is used to indicate practical advice or applications for using a feature The Caution symbol is used to indicate possible pitfalls and other important information Contents About This Mantal ccceseseenesseeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeeseeeeeeaseeeeeenseneseaseeeesaseeeeseaseneseaseneeedseneeesasenesaseneesaseeeeeeaseneeesseueesaseeeeeeas ii Preface What s New in LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 ccccseceseeesseeeeseeeeeneenseeeneeeenseeeneeeeasaeeeseeeaseeeeseee
120. asaeeseeeeseeasaseeseaes viii The Recipient Warehouses tatn i cuccys Sis Ses saesd e fs Moen eng ese peed Sache hs vada dase Reng sede o oven eo ates viii System Drop In Content Elements a a a A aAa a a T E aa E EA EEA Aa N Aa aa ene destaseescesuensees ix Section 1 Introduction to LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 ccsscessesessnessnesseessesssessnesenesseesseessessaessnesseesseesaessoasenasanesanenaees 1 TA System Regue MeN S a eves stenpeishecbetageatbactelaeuhagedebhaced n aa E aA A Ea EA stint AAAS aA TRA eE 2 1 2 New F at re Siennine eE a a o aati a a aeie 2 1 3 How the Manual is Organi ed ireren e a a EEE RE ANEA Eaa Aa EA AAAA E EAE nA eE 2 1 4 LISTSERV Maestro Data Administration Interface 0 eee ccceecceeeeneeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeseeeaeeesnneeeeeeaeeseeaeeeenneeeened 2 Section 2 Introduction to Hosted Data cccscseseeeseessessnessesseessesssesnoeseeesenesaeesaeesaessaessnesseesseesaeeaaesenavoneuaneeanenaees 4 Section 3 Data Administration in LISTSERV Maestro cssccseesseesseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeaseeeeeeee 5 3 1 Role of the Data Administrator atirei aana i e e canned sie Seve eet reeset 5 3 1 1 External Database Requirements 2 c2 c0csce totecseee edie cced eee eai a aeae a 6 3 1 2 Hosted Data Requirements 2 00 ecn cee iri ek eye ieee reine deniers TE AE aE 6 Section 4 The Recipient Warehouse cssscsecssesesseeesseeesseeeeseeesseeeeseeeesaneeseeeesaeeeseeesseesa
121. ataset might additionally be requested to indicate which animals they are interested in reading about The dataset fields and the list fields can all be used as merge fields to personalize e mail content sent with LISTSERV Maestro to the lists The fields can also be used for determining the selection criteria to send targeted e mail to a subset of a list For example when sending an e mail message to the Animal Anecdotes list above the LISTSERV Maestro user can target the message to be sent to only those subscribers who indicated an interest in the animals mentioned in the message Lookup Tables The Recipient Warehouse also holds Lookup Tables defined by the data Administrator The Lookup Tables provide lists of values used in the selection fields Selection fields are special types of data fields where the subscriber selects values from a drop down menu instead of typing in freeform text In the above example the data Administrator could create a Lookup viii Table with all the different types of animals that the list messages will cover There are two types of selection fields the single select field allows the subscriber to choose only one value and the multiple select field allows the subscriber to choose any number of values Lists Two types of Hosted lists can be created in the Recipients Warehouse e Hosted Recipient Lists e Hosted LISTSERV Lists The Hosted Recipient Lists are best for
122. ator and only appears for internally 59 To move an existing list into a category select the list in the left frame Click the Action link and then click Cut The list will appear in the dataset as grayed out The list still exists within LISTSERV Maestro and it has not been disabled in any way It will remain in its current position in the dataset tree until it is pasted somewhere else Select the category to move the list into and then click the Action link Click Paste to move the list into the category To cancel the cut state and leave the list where it is click Clear Cut Copy State from the Action menu Figure 58 Dataset Categories Recipient Dataset Details 2 elles Category Info _ H Customer Care Center gory Edit Category ZI XYZ Monthly Newsletter Name Sales Create Hosted Recipient List Lf xYZ TALK DEMO Description Sales Dept internal lists Create Hosted LISTSERY List oo Internal lists Create Sub Category E HR Cut L TEAM TALK DEMO mE Management S vps Clear Cut Copy State ZD Icon Key Delete Category This list has been cut amp Category Copy Categories only Paste and will be pasted into Hosted Recipient List the Sales category amp Hosted LISTSERV List 4l z Section 9 Adding and Maintaining Dataset Members and List Subscribers Dataset members and list subscribers can be added to a dataset and to lists
123. back to using this approach is that the list would have to be updated manually each time a recipient from a new city is entered into the database To avoid all this time and effort use an SQL statement like select distinct city from recipients order by city This statement accesses the same table as the target group itself see the first SQL statement above using the same database connection settings It generates exactly one column that contains all cities that are currently in the city column in the table in alphabetical order The end user can then simply select one of these cities 141 Figure 134 Parameter Type Selection List Database Specification Data Administrator s View Parameters Enter the necessary details input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing SQL Statement select F_NAME L_NAME EMAIL ADDRESS INTEREST1 INTEREST2 from mae_recipients where CITY IN city Parameter Details Parameter city Label City of residence Description optional Input Type Selection List Multiple Values 7 C Specify list entries manually Retrieve list entries from database SQL Statement select distinct city from mae_recipients The end user s view of this screen is the same as that shown in Figure 133 gt Important The list may only have a maximum
124. be added to the dataset and they too will be shared among the lists in the dataset To add a new field click the Add Field link 11 For each new field enter the following information e Name The name of the field as it will be used internally by the system for mail merging and querying Field names can only use upper and lower case letters A Z and a z the numbers 0 9 and the underscore _ Spaces and other special characters are not allowed e Display Name The display name is the label that identifies the blank field on the web form The display name will be seen by anyone accessing the public web pages to the membership area All alpha numeric characters are permitted as well as spaces and most special characters e Data Type Choose the type of data to be entered in the field from the drop down menu Five different classifications of data are available Text Text fields can accept any type of text including dates in specific formats such as dd mm yyy or mm dd yyyy Number Number fields accept any whole integers Boolean Boolean fields are based on two states one being true the other false Single Select lookup table A single selection field consists of a drop down menu where one item from it may be chosen Multiple Select lookup table A multiple selection field consists of a drop down menu where one or more items from it may be chosen e Mandatory Decide whether
125. be interpreted as literal text and not as an expression or name in the surrounding statement Usually a string literal is set off from the text of the surrounding statement by enclosing it in a special quote character Therefore if the text of the string literal is supposed to contain the quote character itself this contained quote character must be escaped in an appropriate way Where clause A part of a SQL statement that sets the condition that the data must satisfy for the statement to be executed on it For example in the case of a select statement the condition that the data must fulfill to be included in the returned data 148 Appendix A Using Formulas in Hosted Recipient List Target Groups In LISTSERV Maestro calculation formulas are available in the condition tree of target groups of the type Hosted Recipient List This appendix describes the syntax and semantics of these calculation formulas A formula is a sequence of expressions that are combined with operators into more complex expressions Expressions can optionally be nested with parenthesis and make use of a few pre defined functions Examples for formulas are 15 4 27 Max 17 4 24 8 19 22 amp NAME lsoft com ToNum amp AGE 2004 10 ToDate CurrentTimeMillis MM dd yyyy HH mm The following sub sections explain all aspects of formulas in detail Expressions Operands can be of the type number or of the
126. be replaced with a two digit representation of the hour value entered by the end user for example 08 or 23 Available only if a time input format was selected hour1 Will be replaced with a one or two digit representation of the hour value entered by the end user with hours 0 to 9 as one digit and hours 10 to 23 as two digits for example 1 or 23 Available only if a time input format was selected min2 Will be replaced with a two digit representation of the minute value entered by the end user for example 04 or 59 Available only if a time input format was selected mini Will be replaced with a one or two digit representation of the minute value entered by the end user with minutes 0 to 9 as one digit and minutes 10 to 59 as two digits for example 4 or 59 Available only if a time input format was selected sec2 Will be replaced with a two digit representation of the seconds value entered by the end user for example 06 or 59 Available only if the time input format with seconds was selected sec Will be replaced with a one or two digit representation of the seconds value entered by the end user with seconds 0 to 9 as one digit and seconds 10 to 59 as two digits for example 6 or 59 Available only if the time input format with seconds was selected While typing the format string into the input field the sample date time Sep 1 2002 08 04 06 AM will continuously be converted into that
127. before the job is delivered e Database accessed by LISTSERV Maestro This target group type is based on the recipients type Select Recipients from a Database as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a job For more information on this part of the recipients wizard see Section 4 6 Selecting Recipients From a Database in the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual When this target group type is selected the target group wizard will require that a database connection a SQL statement merge column headers and duplicate elimination be entered the same way as when using the underlying recipients type in the recipients wizard Optionally the SQL statement may be parameterized Using parameters in the SQL statement allows the user to define variables in the recipient wizard when this target group is used for a recipient definition For more information on using parameters see Section 18 Defining Parameters e Database accessed by LISTSERV This target group type is based on the recipients type Let LISTSERV Select Recipients From a Database as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a job For more information on this part of the recipients wizard see Section 4 7 Letting LISTSERV Select Recipients From a Database in the LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 User s Manual When this target group type is selected the target group wizard will require that a database name a SQL statement and merge column header
128. ble to only list subscribers or to have no public access If a list is accessible to everyone it will appear on the membership area Web page to anyone visiting that page If the list is accessible only to members the list will not appear in the membership area to everyone it will only appear only to those who are subscribed to the list This essentially closes the list to those who wish to sign themselves up and leaves adding subscribers to the LISTSERV Maestro data administrator while allowing existing subscribers to manage their own settings Lists with no public access do not appear in the membership area to anyone 7 3 Creating LISTSERV Moderated Discussion Lists Similar to the unmoderated discussion list a moderated list allows for the exchange of postings between subscribers but an editor or moderator receives all incoming messages The editor or moderator then decides to accept the message and post it to the list or reject the message and not post it to the list Lists can be set up with more than one moderator and they can take turns reviewing messages in a round robin fashion or all moderators can receive all messages Moderated lists can be of any size and subscriptions can be open to everyone or open to only subscribers Spamming and flaming are much less likely to happen on this type of list because all the postings are subject to approval by a person before they can be posted to the list Moderators receive and review postin
129. bout the parameter Click Save Entry to accept the changes Heading Mail preference Add any additional descriptive Add a new heading or delete an existing one Click Next gt to continue 17 5 Input Preview The next screen in the target group wizard is called Input Preview The screen will appear as it would to regular users who are selecting recipients using this target group in the define recipients wizard Use this screen to verify order labels descriptions parameter types and values If the order of the parameters needs to be changed click the lt Back button If labels or descriptions need to be changed click the Parameters link in the top links bar to re enter the Parameters screen Figure 126 Input Preview for LISTSERV Selects from a Database Target Group Definition Recipients General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Sample Data the previous pages to change the settings Demographics Age between o5 minimum age and 55 maximum age Mail Preference HMTL mail py check box to send HTML mail Text mail p check box to send plain text mail This page shows a preview of the parameter input page as it will be displayed during a recipient definition based on this target group Please verify that the layout is satisfactory If not return to a State of residen
130. bscriber will not be a recipient of the job The condition is defined visually in form of a condition tree which is displayed in the lower part of the wizard page The condition tree consists of hierarchically ordered nodes of various types Each of the nodes has for a given subscriber a certain Boolean true or false state where for nodes that have sub nodes the Boolean state of the node itself is derived by combining the Boolean states of all sub nodes in a certain manner how they are combined depends on the type of the node itself The root node of the whole tree is equivalent to the whole condition that is the Boolean result of the condition is determined by looking at the Boolean state of the root node which in turn derives its state by looking at its subnodes and combining them accordingly and so on Nodes in the condition tree can be of one of two main types e Combination Operator Nodes Such a node does not have a Boolean state itself Instead it derives its Boolean state by combining the states of all its subnodes Thus its name as Combination Operator Such a node is never useful without any subnodes e Condition Nodes Condition nodes derive their Boolean state from the condition that is defined for them They apply the condition to a given subscriber which results either in true or false and thus defines the Boolean state of the node Condition nodes never have subnodes Condition nodes come in two varieties nor
131. cally after the first bounce Posting Restrictions Handling of Attachments Remove all attachments before postings are distributed Topics DEVELOPERS INSTRUCTORS PARENTS CHILDREN ART LANGUAGE List Topics MUSIC MATH Click Finish to accept the list as it is summarized and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen 36 7 2 Creating LISTSERV Unmoderated Discussion Lists Unmoderated discussion lists allow for two way interaction between group members These open forums facilitate ongoing discussions among members They are most commonly used for internal communication within an organization or group of people For instance many universities use secure class lists for interaction between students and teachers or to conduct remote teaching Unlike a one way list a discussion list not only allows but also encourages interaction between members who are part of the group Every member can write to the list and in doing so all members will receive a copy of the message In this way discussions can take place and views can be exchanged among a large number of people Two way discussion lists can be open for anyone to join or closed so that membership is controlled by the data administrator Open public discussion lists tend to be large with many messages being posted high volume They can take up a lot of server space and they can be open to spamming spoofing and flaming if there are no oversight measures i
132. ce Using the selections lists checkboxes input fields and or date fields make selections for each parameter type Click Next gt to continue 132 17 6 Recipients Details When LISTSERV selects recipients from a database the screen is split into two sections Recipient Identification Columns and Additional Merge Columns Under Recipient Identification Columns specify which of the recipients columns in the database contains the e mail addresses that will be used for delivery Type the column name in the corresponding edit box Optionally specify which of the recipient columns in the database contains the names of the recipients by typing the column name in the corresponding edit box If a column name is entered the names of the recipients will be included in the To field of each individual message making the mail more personalized If other data in the database is going to be used for mail merging it is necessary to identify each of the column names Under Additional Merge Columns type each column name in the corresponding edit box one name per row Mail merging is optional but if employed other recipient data can be used in the message making it more personal For more information on using merging fields see the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual Section 5 6 Merging Fields and Conditional Blocks Figure 127 Recipient Details for LISTERV Selects Recipients from a Database Target Gro
133. ch column of data separated correctly and labeled with a header row If LISTSERV Maestro has not interpreted the data correctly or an unconventional delimiter and or quote character has been used click on the link Specify details manually to configure the data manually Use the Specify details manually link when the delimiter separator character or the quote character is used in some of the data fields For example if the USERNAME field contained Tom the cool cat Jones as an entry and double quotes happened to be the quote character for the file the details would have to be specified manually The same would be true if a field named LOCATION contained the entry Atlanta GA where the comma was the separator character 112 Figure 108 Upload Wizard Parse Manually Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Duplicate Elimination Summary Caneel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parse Recipients Character Encoding Column Separator and Quote Character Specify how the columns in the file are separated Columns are separated by Comma Select a separator character from the drop down menu Specify if and how the columns in the file are additionally enclosed Columns are not enclosed by a quote character Columns are enclosed by other ff L Hada ages rag esplaaeac from the E Specify the language that the file is encoded with Character
134. cipients of an E mail Job in the LISTSERV Maestro 1 2 User s Manual The recipient wizard is comprised of five separate screens On the first screen Options users can elect to Send to a Recipient target group The second screen called the Source screen will then contain a listing all of the available target groups The data administrator may place target groups on this screen within categories for organizational purposes Use the drop down menu to select a category if appropriate Once the category is selected the target groups listed in the table will change to list only those in that category To select a target group to use for the recipients list click on the name of the target group The Source screen will confirm the selection If the selection is correct click the Next gt button To change the target group click the link Select Different Target Group which will re open the first source screen Figure 137 Source Screen for Recipient Target Groups Define Recipients Options Source Cancel lt Back Next Source Information about the currently selected recipients target group Select a target group category then select a target group by clicking on the name in the list below Category lt No Category gt gt 4 j US thee drop down menu to select a Mail Type category Description Recipients preference of mail type HTML or plain text Appears as a check box If
135. column name per line These column names can be used for mail merge placeholders in the body of the e mail message 107 Figure 102 Recipient Details for Non Hosted LISTSERV Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details ees Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Recipients Details Specify the names of the columns you want to use for mail merge Recipient Identification Columns E mail Column TO Name Column FULL_NAME Additional Mail Merge Columns Enter the names of the columns that will be used for mail merging one per row Merge Columns pop optional HTML Add merge columns from the DBMS to create personalized messages Click Next gt to continue 14 8 Summary The Summary screen displays all the selections for the target group definition listing conditions and parameters In order for regular users to access the target group it must be enabled Check the box next to Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group to enable it If left unchecked the target group will not appear in the list of available target groups to regular users 108 Figure 103 Summary Target Group Definition a c recipients General Source Source Details Parameters Input Layout Input Preview borer 2 Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the target group definition
136. criber Access URLs link found on the Actions menu of the Recipients Dataset Details screen Each dataset will contain e Login This URL will bring existing members to their membership page when they enter their e mail address and password Members that have been added by the data administrator but do not have a password can enter their e mail address and request a password Members that have forgotten their password can request a new one There is also a link that brings people who are not members to the join membership area page e Join Membership Area This URL brings a perspective member to the sign up page for the membership area dataset See Figure 74 e Subscribe List list name This URLs brings a perspective subscriber to the list s subscription page See Figure 78 Every list in the dataset will have its own subscription URL Figure 79 Subscriber Access URLs Recipient Dataset Details Cnaam l H 8 DEVELOP xYZ Dataset Info Edit Dataset Settings j NEWS FROM xYZ Name XYZ Company Create Hosted Recipient List i TALK BACK TO XY Description XYZ Customer Center Create Hosted LISTSERY List E XYZ Monthly News Members 38 0 yet unconfirmed Create Category Open to everyone Browse Edit Confirmed Members Each list in the Encoding West European ISO 1 Add Single Member dataset has its Shared Fields Modify Members by Upload Download all Members own Subscribe EMAIL ee Text
137. ct the entry to move and click Up or Down to move it in the list To delete an entry select it and click Delete Figure 132 Parameter Type Selection List Manual Specification Data Administrator s View Parameters Enter the necessary details input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing SQL Statement select F_NAME L_NAME EMAIL_ADDRESS INTEREST1 INTEREST2 from mae_recipients where CITY city Parameter Details Parameter city Label City of residence Description optional Input Type Selection List Single Value v Specify list entries manually Retrieve list entries from database Text in Selection List Internal Parameter Value albany albany Save Entry Up Down New Delete 140 Figure 133 Parameter Type Selection List End User s View Define Recipients Options Source Source Details Cancel lt Back Next Input Values for Target Group Parameters Enter values for all parameters of the selected target group City of residence 18 2 3 2 Database specification Enter a SQL statement into the edit box This statement will be executed with the same connection parameters that were specified on the Source screen of the wizard The result set retrieved will be used to populate the selection
138. ct the type of encoding for the data entered in the dataset from the drop down menu e Public Description This optional information appears on the web form and will assist anyone wanting to join a member area and subscribe to a mailing list to understand what the benefits of membership are Any additional information about the organization can be placed here Figure 5 Recipient Dataset Definition Wizard General Recipient Dataset Definition General Profile Fields Profile Field Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit Next gt General Fill in the general information about the dataset The list administrator e mail address must be an authentic address that subscribers can mail to Name xYZ Company List Administrator Jwebmaster xyz com E mail address webmaster xyz com Internal Description XYZ Customer Center Encoding West European ISO 1 7 See allel Join our XYZ Company Customer Care Center to stay informed on all the a new products showcasing this season Sign up to beta test our new software join our discussion lists to talk about your favorite XYZ product The next screen in the wizard is called Profile Fields Every new dataset begins with one mandatory field called EMAIL With just this one field it is possible to create an entire dataset The e mail address of each member will be shared among all the lists created in this dataset Other fields can
139. cters The 8 bit range of 0 255 is not enough to accommodate all letters from even the European languages at once therefore there is a need for more than a dozen different members of the ISO 8859 family Also 8 bit charsets do not take into account the other major language groups of the world such as Asian languages To address the limitations of 8 bit charsets recently the 16 bit charset Unicode with a range for 65536 characters has become more and more widespread This charset contains more or less all letters and characters from the most widely used languages as well as a set of symbols and other useful characters LISTSERV Maestro offers Unicode in the form of its UTF 8 variant UTF 8 is a transfer encoding for the 16 bit Unicode charset which maps Unicode characters to one two or more bytes in a way that more common characters like ASCII characters need fewer bytes than uncommon characters Again for convenience the first 128 characters of Unicode 0 127 are the same as in the ASCII charset while the first 256 characters 0 255 are the same as in ISO 8859 1 West European A large percentage of all other letters of world languages are assigned values from 256 to 65535 although not even the large range of Unicode is enough to accommodate all letters from all languages LISTSERV Maestro and International Character Sets What happens when international characters are used in e mail messages written and delivered in LISTSERV
140. cters with right to left reading direction in the case of a Hebrew text that contains English names for example Some clients may only display the characters with the right direction but still left align each line of text instead of the correct right alignment Occurrences such as this are subject to the mail client itself and out of the scope of LISTSERV Maestro 197 This page left intentionally blank 198
141. ctions L Soft departments lists z download test list not used by any recipient datasets and or mailing Actions download test list lists transportation not used by any recipient datasets and or mailing Actions Methods of transportation lists Create New Lookup Table Part of the dataset design process is deciding the format of the data collected and how it is presented on the web form One type of data that needs special mention is the selection list A selection list is presented as a drop down menu where one single select or more multi select items can be chosen LISTSERV Maestro handles the creation of selection lists under the function of Lookup Tables A lookup table is a collection of entries for a selection list Lookup tables can be used by any dataset in the warehouse When designed well they can serve multiple functions across a warehouse For example a listing of university departments in one dataset can be used as a list of college majors in another A listing of years can be used for graduation year in one dataset and anniversary year in another Creating Lookup tables is covered in depth in Section 4 1 2 Creating a Lookup Table Tip If your dataset is going to use selection menus to save time create the lookup tables first and the then create the dataset 4 1 1 Creating a New Dataset The recipient dataset definition wizard details all the steps of designing a dataset with its accompanying web form Click on the
142. currently selected The following sub sections contain descriptions of the possible choices for each of the three parts of a condition Left Operand The following choices are available for the left operand Field The left operand is one of the profile fields available in the hosted recipient list the target group is based on To define an operand of this type select the field from the first drop down list The second control then becomes a drop down list too where you now select the field to use Number The left operand is a constant number To define an operand of this type select the number from the first drop down list The second control then becomes an edit field where you now enter the number value to use Text The left operand is a constant text string To define an operand of this type select the text from the first drop down list The second control then becomes an edit field where you now enter the text string to use Boolean The left operand is a constant Boolean value of true or false To define an operand of this type select the Boolean value from the first drop down list The second control then becomes a drop down list too where you now select the Boolean value to use Formula The left operand is a formula When the condition is evaluated the formula is evaluated first and its result is used as the left operand of the condition To define an operand of this type select the value of the
143. d and any encoding change made click Refresh Preview to have LISTSERV Maestro attempt to parse the file again with the new settings The new columns will then be displayed If the columns are now separated correctly proceed If the columns are not correct repeat the process and click Refresh Preview to see the new changes Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with each column of data is separated correctly and labeled with a header row Headers are specially defined rows in database tables Headers are used by database tables to label the columns of data so that the system and the user can correctly identify the columns An uploaded text file may contain headers or not If the file does not contain headers select the option button No the file does not contain a header row and the system will automatically add a header row Each column of data in the header row will have a generic name using the pattern COL1 COL2 COL3 and so on If the uploaded file does have a header row select the option button Yes the first row in the file containers headers and the headers within the file will be used Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with each column of data is separated correctly and labeled with a header row 15 4 Recipient Details Once LISTSERV Maestro can successfully separate the recipient data into columns or otherwise quantify the data the next steps are to define the colu
144. d Topics in the list header Lists can have up to 23 topics defined in the header List subscribers can elect to receive only those messages that fit into the topic s they are interested in reading Similarly messages can be posted only to specific topics For example a large list could have the general subject of XYZ Software Topics could be defined by the types of users of the software the type software purchased the tips and tricks for using the software For more information on Topics see the LISTSERV List Owner s Manual To define a new topic simply click the New Topic link and fill out the empty topic row that appears In the list topics are displayed either in the display mode or in the editable mode In the display mode each topic has an associated Edit link to set it into the editable mode In the editable mode each topic has the associated links Reset forget changes and reset the topic to the state it had when the editable mode was last entered for it Up move the topic up one step in the topics list Down move the topic down ones step in the topics list and Remove remove the topic When the topics settings of a list that already has subscribers changes all current subscribers topics selections need to be adjusted This will occur when the LISTSERV list wizard is completed The adjustment may take some time and a progress bar will be displayed as the system works fip Changing topics on for a list where subscribers are c
145. d but not yet sent Start New Job Resume Job Ya 4 4 Jobs that have been delivered and quick reports 5 5 Create tracking reports and download tracking data 6 Outbox Delvered obs Tracking Reports 6 Create datasets lookup tables mailing lists and 6 7 administer recipient target groups 7 g 7 User settings saved profiles drop in content elements a m user password Recipient Warehouse User Settings The center of the opening screen of LISTSERV Maestro contains six large icons that activate the major functional areas of the program e Start New Job Starts the definition of a new e mail job e Resume Job Lists all jobs that have been started but have not yet been approved for delivery Jobs listed here can be edited e Outbox Contains a listing of jobs that have been defined scheduled and approved for delivery but have not yet been sent The Outbox also lists jobs that have failed during delivery for some reason e Delivered Jobs Lists all the e mail jobs that have been delivered From here it is possible to generate quick reports on a selected job e Tracking Reports Engages the reporting wizard to produce graphs and reports from the tracking data collected from delivered messages e Recipient Warehouse Create datasets lookup tables and mailing lists hosted inside LISTSERV Maestro Also available here is the recipient target group wizard that facilitates the creation of target groups e Use
146. d by regular users to locate and identify the target groups they want to use for jobs Both name and description are mandatory Enter a meaningful name and a good description so the regular users who are selecting target groups in the recipients wizard will have all the information they need to decide which target group to use Target groups can be clustered in categories making it easier for regular users to select a target group A category is meant to contain target groups that are related to each other The intent of categories is to minimize the time needed to locate a specific target group By selecting 92 a category first users do not need to browse through all the available target groups but only those in the relevant category To add a target group to a category select the category for the target group from the drop down menu To create a new category click the New Category link and define a new category by entering its name into the edit field Target group categories are optional If no category is selected or created target groups are placed into lt No Category gt Figure 83 Target Group Wizard General Target Group Definition General Source Cancel Save amp Exit General Type the name of the new category here Enter a target group name and a description Optionally select a category or create a new one Name Type in a descriptive name Category web signup Select
147. d can safely be ignored Files uploaded to the system must be in TXT or cSv format one record per line The columns of data in the file do not have to be in the same order as they appear in the dataset or list A header row is not required but if the file has a header row the header names do not have to be the same as the field names in the dataset or list The upload wizard will assist with parsing the data and matching header and field names For more information on text formatted files see Appendix B About Comma Separated Files To modify the current members of a dataset select the dataset then click Modify Members by Upload from the actions menu To modify subscribers of a list select the list and then click Modify Members by Upload from the actions menu 9 3 1 1 Type The first screen of the upload wizard is Type The existing data can be modified five different ways Select the option button next to the type of modification to be performed Available types for datasets are e Add to Dataset Adds new members to the dataset All existing members are left unchanged e Update in Dataset Updates the existing members with the values fond in the file Does not add any new members to the dataset e Synchronize with Dataset This is a combination of the add and update functions Adds any new members found in the file and updates values for existing members found in the file e Full Synchronize with Dataset T
148. d for each subscriber comprised of a first name and last name separated by a space If a single mandatory data field exists for each subscriber containing a full name that meets this criterion move that field from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box If two fields are required to make up a full name each of these fields must be mandatory Move each of the fields from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box The second field is added after the first field leaving a space in between This makes it easy to combine a first name field with a last name field to produce a full name field for example Use the Move Up and Move Down links to change the order of the name fields Figure 47 LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Field Details LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field General List Type List Options Topics Summary Fields Details tions Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields Details Specify which of the LISTSERY list fields are used to assemble the Full Name of the list subscriber Select a mandatory single field that contains a valid full name consisting of at least a first name and a last name separated by a space This will be validated during input Alternatively select several fields two of which must be mandatory any remaining fields may be Optional that the Full Name can be assembled from by appending the fields in the given order
149. d names This page displays the members of the selected dataset Optional fields can be blank Page 1 2 3 lected by filter 36 of 36 members Delete Use these page navigation links to view members 15 per page z EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE Y fT Lo o OE E E Lore Anna maestro demo soft com Anna Anchor battle ship blues 4 1972 Bob maestro demo soft com Bob Bouchard look up 99 ili Chuck maestro dema lsoft com Chuck Cho rock music T Darren maestro demoa lsoft com Darren Donagel beam me up 2 1960 E Evelyn maestro demo lsoft com Evelyn Eavensong midnite 12 1950 F Frank maestro demo soft com Frank Fortuna lucky 2 1964 i Gina maestro demo lsoft com Gina Gallino italian fil78 3 1982 T Hilda maestro demo soft com Hilda Hines catch me now T Ines maestro demo lsoft com Ines Ito pack rat6 4 1974 T Jocelyne maestro demo lsoft com Jocelyne Jones dow joney 3 1976 F Ken maestro demo soft com Ken Kawasowi hotrod62 2 1962 F Lisa maestro demo l soft com Lisa Lopez sky88 3 1984 Li Mirjam maestro demolsoft com Mirjam McIntosh apple pie i 1969 T Nancy maestro demo lsoft com Nancy Nelson nelly 2 1982 Ti Odette maestro demalsoft com Odette Owi leap frog i 1976 T Figure 62 Managing List Subscribers Manage Subscribers of Hosted List This page displays the subscribers of the selected list Profile field names Optional fields can be blank Selected LISTSERV topics Page 12 3 eDected by
150. d to the confirmation e mail message sent to them by the system The members of a dataset or list are displayed 15 at a time per page A navigation system for paging through members appears when more than 15 members are in a dataset or list Each page number is a clickable link and contains the next 15 members or subscribers A maximum of ten page links will appear on the screen at a time Datasets and list with more than ten pages will use lt lt to denote pages behind the open page and gt gt to denote pages ahead of the open page Members and subscribers are sorted alphabetically by e mail address Members have their entire dataset profile displayed on the screen Subscribers have their dataset profile along with any list specific fields displayed on the screen The table header lists the profile field names in the dataset and list Each column in the table represents one profile field on the web form Each field is filled out with the corresponding value for that profile field and member Mandatory fields have all values filled in for members while optional fields can be blank Boolean fields will have a T for true and an F for false Datasets with selection menus that allow for multiple selections will display all selected values separated by a commas LISTSERV lists that have topics have all the selected topics displayed 62 Figure 61 Managing Members of a Dataset Manage Members of Recipient Dataset _ Profile fiel
151. datasets in your warehouse Click on a recipient dataset to open it or use the button to create a new dataset Dataset Name Description Members L Soft international Inc L Soft customers 34 0 yet unconfirmed PetsMart Company PetsMart Company 12 0 yet unconfirmed Widget Company Widget Company 33 1 yet unconfirmed Create New Dataset The Lookup Tables tab contains a listing of the names of any existing lookup tables the datasets and mailing lists that reference them and a link for editing and downloading Figure 4 Lookup Tables Recipient Warehouse This page displays an overview of all recipient datasets and lookup tables in your warehouse Recipient Datasets Lookup Tables This page contains all the lookup tables for your warehouse Use the Actions link for a lookup table entry in the list below to view modify or delete a lookup table Use the button to create a new lookup table Lookup Table References Industry 1 columns of 1 recipient datasets and or mailing Edit Name Description Business and industry types lists 3 Edit alues Models not used by any recipient datasets and or mailing View References 4ir Cleaner Model numbers and lists name Download alues Pets 1 columns of 1 recipient datasets and or mailing Actions list of pet types lists States 1 columns of 1 recipient datasets and or mailing Actions All the States lists departments 1 columns of 1 recipient datasets and or mailing A
152. ddress where they can be reviewed and action can be taken manually Subscriber addresses that generate bounces will not be removed from the list automatically no matter the number of bounces Figure 39 LISTSERV List Wizard Bounce Handling List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define how bounced messages will be handled by the LISTSERY list Action to Take on Bounces C Remove subscribers immediately on first bounce Remove subscribers after 10 bounces within days Collect bounces for manual processing The next tab List Archives will only appear if archives have been enabled in the HUB List archives are a searchable history of all the messages posted to the list Disabled Enabled Click the adjacent option button to enable or disable archives for the list Although the ability to have archives is granted in the HUB archives for individual lists can be disabled here Create new archive files Set the time frame for the creation of new archive files using the drop down menu Archives can be created on a weekly monthly or yearly basis Archive viewable by Sets the access level for list archives Archives can be open to anyone subscriber or non subscriber of a list open to only subscribers or open to administrators only 43 Figure 40 LISTSERV List Wizard Archives List Op
153. define which links to examine as it will always be all links of the source job which are examined User defined list stored in parameter If selected then only the click events of a certain list of links in the source job will be examined to determine the condition state Which links will appear in this list is not defined here at the time the condition is specified but is instead defined by the end user who employs this target group in the recipients wizard by filling out a parameter The parameter s name needs to be specified here together with the selected option button Later in the recipients wizard the selection of links will be made in a multiple selection box and the resulting list of links to examine will be stored in the parameter with the name specified here The condition will then look at the list in this parameter to determine its Boolean state Note that if you specify the same parameter name in different job based condition nodes it will be interpreted as one parameter that appears several times in the condition tree all appearances will be filled out with the same list of selected links depending on the end user s choices A parameter with the same name in a normal condition node or a condition formula may not be used Additional Issues with Job Based Conditions and Tracking Events If the option of examining the tracking events of the source job is selected additional issues must be considered With this option enab
154. definition of recipients based on this target group located under the first category General Information Target groups that are enabled meet all the requirements for the definition of recipients and they are available for use in the recipients wizard To disable a target group uncheck the box labeled Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group This will put the target group into a state called Complete where all the requirements for the definition of recipients are met but the target group is not released for use in the recipients wizard LISTSERV Selects from a Database Summary Target Group Definition cipients General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Saas ae Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the settings specified for this target group definition General Information Name LISTSERV selects from a database Description LISTSERV selects directly from database This target group definition meets all necessary requirements for the definition of recipients Yes allow the definition of recipients based on this target group SQL Statement and Parameters Database Server lt default gt Quote Character Escaped Quote SQL Statement SELECT EMAIL_ADDRESS AS EMAIL F_NAME AS FIRSTNAME F_NAME L_NAME AS FULLNAME INTEREST1 AS MODELNO INTEREST2 AS PET INTEREST4 AS OWN_OR_RENT INTERESTS AS NEWS_SOU
155. dress where they can be reviewed and action can be taken manually Subscriber addresses that generate bounces will not be removed from the list automatically no matter the number of bounces Figure 51 LISTSERV List Wizard Bounce Handling List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define how bounced messages will be handled by the LISTSERY list Action to Take on Bounces C Remove subscribers immediately on first bounce Remove subscribers after 10 bounces within days Collect bounces for manual processing 53 The next tab List Archives will only appear if archives have been enabled in the HUB List archives are a searchable history of all the messages posted to the list e Disabled Enabled Click the adjacent option button to enable or disable archives for the list Although the ability to have archives is granted in the HUB archives for individual lists can be disabled here e Create new archive files Set the time frame for the creation of new archive files using the drop down menu Archives can be created on a weekly monthly or yearly basis e Archive viewable by Sets the access level for list archives Archives can be open to anyone subscriber or non subscriber of a list open to only subscribers or open to administrators only Figure 52 LISTSERV List Wizard Archives Li
156. ds out from the normal page background Custom style class disabledEditField Used to render edit fields and selection fields in a grayed state to make their disabled nature more apparent 173 tableframe subscribeStepActiveTitl subscribeStepInactiveTitle description subscribed notsubscribed selectedTab tableThickFrame tableBottomLine tableRightLine Custom style class tableframe Used to render a frame around box like tables that group together certain related input fields or texts Also used to render the member area pages to appear in a tabbed style with two tabs for My Lists and My Profile Surrounds the two tabs at the top Custom style class subscribeStepActiveTitle Used to render the title of the currently active subscription step step 1 or 2 on the page where a subscriber can join the member area or subscribe to a list without first logging in to make it stand out from the other currently inactive step Custom style class subscribeStepInactiveTitle Corresponding inactive style for the subscribeStepActiveTitle style see above Used to render the title of the currently inactive subscription step Custom style class description Used to render the public description of the membership area or current category if any Custom style class subscribed Used to render the Yes marker in the column Subscribed of the table of available mailing lists in the membership
157. e C Subscribers only Administrators only Click Next gt to continue 32 7 1 6 Posting Restrictions for LISTSERV Announcement Lists Posting restrictions set limitations on message attachments message size and the number of messages that can be sent to the list These restrictions affect the sender of messages to the LISTSERV list when they are submitted as standard list postings A standard list posting is a normal e mail message sent to the list with no mail merging Standard list messages can be received in a digest form and can be viewed in the list archives if archives have been created for the list Standard list messages limit the type of available tracking to blind tracking only There are two tabs that set posting restrictions for an announcement list e Attachment Handling Sets the action the list will take when standard messages are receive with attachments There are three options O Accept all posts even if contain attachments o Accept all posts but remove attachments the message itself will be delivered to the list but any attachments will be stripped off Reject all posts if they contain attachments any message submitted to the list with attachments will be automatically rejected Figure 29 LISTSERV List Wizard Handling Attachments Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Attachment Handlin
158. e Other if this is chosen type the character into the adjacent box After separator and quote characters have been entered and any encoding change made click Refresh Preview to have LISTSERV Maestro attempt to parse the file again with the new settings The new columns will then be displayed If the columns are now separated correctly proceed If the columns are not correct repeat the process and click Refresh Preview to see the new changes Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with each column of data is separated correctly and labeled with a header row Headers are specially defined rows in database tables Headers are used by database tables to label the columns of data so that the system and the user can correctly identify the columns An uploaded text file may contain headers or not If the file does not contain headers select the option button No the file does not contain a header row and the system will automatically add a header row Each column of data in the header row will have a generic name using the pattern COL1 COL2 COL3 and so on If the uploaded file does have a header row select the option button Yes the first row in the file containers headers and the headers within the file will be used Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with each column of data is separated correctly and labeled with a header row 9 3 1 5 Map Fields The next screen in the up
159. e content 119 changes between that moment and the actual sending of the job those changes will not be reflected in the list of recipients of the job e Just before sending The SQL statement will be executed when this target group is used in the recipients wizard to define the recipients of a job at the moment before the job is actually sent This means that if the end user chooses this target group in the recipients wizard then the list of the actual recipients is defined at the moment the job is actually sent which may be some time after the recipients wizard is completed If the database content changes between the completion of the recipients wizard and the actual sending of the job those changes will be reflected in the list of recipients of the job gt Important If the database is not available during the sending of the job the job will fail Be sure to coordinate sending time and database maintenance time to avoid any conflicts Figure 114 Target Group Wizard Source Target Group Definition Recipients Duplicate General Source Parameters Input Layout Input Preview Details Elimination Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Source Supply the database connection details and an SQL statement Database Plugin IBM DB2 V7 2 Driver Database Plugin 7 Database Name webform DB2 Server User Name db2admin Connection values for the database Password eecccecce SQL Statement
160. e for no choice meaning that members do not select from any of the items presented on the selection list This entry can also be the first selection on the list or the most popular or common selection on the list LISTSERV Maestro defaults to an entry that says lt none gt but this can be changed by clicking the Edit link and adding different text Figure 11Enter Lookup Table Entries Edit Lookup Table Entries Entries of Lookup Table Countries Use this page to edit the entries of a lookup table You are editing the entries of the value list Countries which is not used currently by any recipient datasets and or mailing lists Click on the edit link next to the lookup table entry in the list below to select it for editing Click Add New Entry to create a new entry Value lt none gt ED Default value for no choice Add New Entry Upload Entries y Use this link to edit the default no choice value Use these buttons to add items to the selection list Lookup table entries can be added manually one by one or they can be uploaded from a text file that contains one entry per line The number of entries for any single lookup table is limited to 200 items To add single entries click the Add New Entry button Type one item in the text box and then click OK Click the button Add New Entry again to add the next item To upload a text file click the Upload Entries button Browse for the
161. e is the user defined text entered as the Sample Sub Category Description Category Another Sub Category Yes Sample List Edit Profile This is the description of the first Unsubscribe sample list Subscribed List Name Action Description Sub Category 3 Yes Another List Unsubscribe The description of the second sample list The text shown here is user defined SAMPLE L Subscribe The description of SAMPLE L The displayed description is the one entered as the Public Description of the hosted list Unsubscribe from all currently subscribed lists in this category The following shows a few HTML styles commonly used on the subscriber pages including few further custom styles which are used for special purposes Please see the manual for more details This is the header style lt H1 gt lt H1 gt This is the header style lt H2 gt lt H2 gt This is a standard text paragraph enclosed with lt P gt lt P gt This text is a clickable link with lt A gt lt A gt This text has the style class small This text has the style class emphasis This text has the style class error This text has the style class emphasisBackground This is the table header style lt TH gt lt TH gt This is the table cell style lt TD gt lt TD gt This sample table as a whole is assigned the custom style tableframe a single line input field a dis a button a disabled button I a chec
162. e links Parameters highlighted in yellow are undefined and parameters appearing as normal links have already been defined Click on any parameter highlighted or not to select it Fill out the parameter s initial definition or edit an existing definition in the lower part of the screen The definition of the parameters made here will affect the choices that the end user will have when using this target group in the recipients wizard For information on creating parameters and the different parameter types available see Section 18 Defining Parameters Input values for parameters to determine the values of single selection or multiple selection lists must be manually entered This is because LISTSERV Maestro is not connected directly with the database and therefore does not know what values exist in the data tables 130 Figure 124 Target Group Wizard Parameters Target Group Definition General Source Parameters Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameters Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing Enter the necessary details including input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement SQL Statement SELECT EMAIL ADDRESS AS EMAIL F_NAME AS FIRSTNAME F_NAME Il L_NAME AS FULLNAME INTEREST1 AS MODELNO INTEREST2 AS PET INTEREST4 AS OWN_OR_RENT INTERESTS AS NEWS_SOURCE AGE EMAIL TYPE FROM mae recipients WHER
163. e mail server and returned to the sender undeliverable LISTSERV lists can handle bounces by removing the subscriber addresses of bounced messages automatically or by collecting bounces for manual action Manually processed bounces are sent to the list administrator s mailbox Select one of the three available the bounce processing options e Remove immediately after first bounce The address that bounced the mail will be removed from the list after the first bounce Subscribers will have to be re added to the list to receive any additional mail e Remove subscribers after X bounces within X days Enter the number of bounces that are permitted in the first text box and the number days they can occur over in the second box This setting is more flexible than the first setting in that if the reason for the 31 bounce is temporary such as a full mailbox the message can be sent again with the set number of days Subscribers will not be removed from the list if the message can be delivered within the set number of allowable bounces and days Collect bounces for manual processing Bounce addresses will be sent to a specific address where they can be reviewed and action can be taken manually Subscriber addresses that generate bounces will not be removed from the list automatically no matter the number of bounces Figure 27 LISTSERV List Wizard Bounce Handling List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list
164. e whole statement when the regular user defines it Quote character In a SQL statement a character usually the single quote used to enclose string literals to set them off from the rest of the SQL statement In a text file CSV file containing data a character or symbol used to surround a separator character that is used in the actual data in a column so that the separator character is not confused with the character that appears in the data For example if a comma is used as the separator character in a database file all the fields of data are separated by a comma If the comma is also used within a field a quote character must surround the entire field If the quote character is used in a field it must be used twice or escaped 147 Recipients Warehouse The repository for a group s data including lookup tables datasets hosted lists and recipient data Select Statement A SQL statement in form of a query that is issued to a database to retrieve data Single value A parameter type that allows for the selection of only one value to fill in the select statement SQL Abbreviation of Structured Query Language SQL is a standardized query language for requesting information from a database SQL Statement A statement written in SQL that is issued to a database to retrieve data or to create insert update or delete data in the database String literal A series of characters that are to
165. e will help regular users understand what they are selecting for their recipients definition Select the input type either a single select list or a multiple select list Single select allows one topic choice from the drop down menu and multiple select allows for more than one topic choice from the drop down menu Use the Up and Down links to shift the appearance order of the topics in the drop down menu 103 Figure 95 LISTSERV Topics as Parameters Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Recirients Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameters Specify the label and optionally a description for the topics parameter Additionally you may edit the selection list entries for the topics parameter Parameter Details Label List Topics Description Select the topic s from the XYZ Developer s list optional Input Type Selection List Multiple Values zja Select multiple values or single value for the input type Display Name Corresponding Topic read only WINDOWS WINDOWS Save Entry MAC LINUX Shift the order of the topics using these links Click Next gt to continue 14 4 2 Conditional Expression Parameters Conditional expressions may have one or more parameters Parameters that are highlighted in yellow are undefined and parameters appearing as normal links have already been defined Click on any p
166. ear Cut Copy State Aborts any ongoing Cut amp Paste or Copy amp Paste operation that was started with either of the commands Cut or Copy Any previously marked node will become unmarked and the Paste command will no longer be available e Delete Deletes the selected combination node and all its sub nodes after confirmation This is not recoverable Note The Delete command is not available for the top level combination node since this node cannot be deleted For condition type nodes both for normal and job based conditions the following actions may be available depending on the current state e Edit Opens a popup dialog box in which the settings of the condition can be edited 181 Insert Combination Operator Creates a new combination operator node and inserts it as the new parent node of the currently selected condition node The selected condition node will initially be the only child of the freshly created combination node and the new combination node will be placed in the same parent node as the condition node was before Cut Marks the selected condition node for Cut amp Paste In this state the node is displayed with a grayed name to visualize that it has been designated for Cut amp Paste The node is not actually cut removed from its current location until the Paste command is selected at a different location The grayed state is only a visual reminder that the node has been marked
167. ed as well as spaces and most special characters Data Type Choose the type of data to be entered in the field from the drop down menu Five different classifications of data are available Text Text fields can accept any type of text including dates in specific formats such as dd mm yyy or mm dd yyyy Number Number fields accept any whole integers Boolean Boolean fields are based on two states one being true the other false Single Select lookup table A single selection field consists of a drop down menu where one item from it may be chosen Multiple Select lookup table A multiple selection field consists of a drop down menu where one or more items from it may be chosen 20 e Mandatory Decide whether the data is mandatory for subscribers to enter into the web form or optional Boolean fields cannot be optional due to the nature of the data type the selection equates to either true or false After list fields are created they can be edited removed moved up or moved down by using the corresponding links on the right side of the table Fields that are part of the dataset cannot be moved or edited from this screen Figure 15 Hosted Recipient List Wizard Profile Fields Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields The list below displays the shared fi
168. ed links Reset forget changes and reset the topic to the state it had when the editable mode was last entered for it Up move the topic up one step in the topics list Down move the topic down ones step in the topics list and Remove remove the topic When the topics settings of a list that already has subscribers changes all current subscribers topics selections need to be adjusted This will occur when the LISTSERV list wizard is completed The adjustment may take some time and a progress bar will be displayed as the system works fip Changing topics on for a list where subscribers are currently very active needs to be carefully considered so a major disruption does not occur A better strategy would be to temporarily close the hosted LISTSERV list for maintenance see Summary page adjust the topics and then re open the list When adding new topics to a list that already has subscribers an additional checkbox option Existing subscribers will have the new topics selected automatically will appear Check this option to automatically add all the existing subscribers to the new topics When left unchecked existing subscribers will not be subscribed to the new topics Subscribers will be able to change their settings to add or drop the new topics when they wish This checkbox option applies to all topics that are added on this page during the same list wizard session To add several topics some of which the current subscribers are automa
169. ed to target subsets of the lists Will archives be needed for any LISTSERV lists Will LISTSERV s auto deletion of bouncing addresses be needed Will subscribers be allowed to manage their own subscriptions and subscribe and unsubscribe themselves or will only the database administrator have access to the membership data Will the subscriber pages need to be customized or is the out of the box look acceptable For each data item to be collected for the dataset or the list What type is it Text Number Boolean Single Select Multiple Select If Single Select or Multiple Select what are the possible selections Is it optional or mandatory Are there any legal requirements associated with the kind of data to be collected That is are they subject to various financial health and other privacy laws of the country or state where the data will be stored as well as where the subscribers themselves are located for example HIPAA GLB Act European Commission s Directive on Data Protection and so on If so does the facility meet the data protection requirements If it does not reconsider the data to be collected or upgrade the facility to meet legal requirements It is important to think about the data that will be collected before creating the dataset Careful dataset design includes consideration of ease of creating target groups as well as making it easy for subscribers to enter and maintain their data T
170. edgement message to posting subscriber Posting Restrictions Handling of Attachments Postings may contain attachments Toples List Topics WINDOWS MAC LINUX Click Finish to save the list and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen Section 8 Organizing Datasets Datasets that have few lists usually have no special need to organize them in any particular way Lists are displayed in alphabetical order by list name regardless of the type of list hosted recipient list or hosted LISTSERV list Subscribers will be able to see all the lists available to them on one page and will not have to scroll to find them Administrators will recognize each list present in the dataset Datasets that have many lists or that want to make a clear distinction between one set of lists and another can use categories and sub categories to organize the lists Categories act like folders and sub folders They can be created at any time either before or after the creation of hosted lists Existing lists can be moved into and out of categories by cutting and pasting New lists can be created inside existing categories To create a new category in a dataset click the Actions link and then click the Create Category link Give the category a name The name will appear in the left frame and on any public web pages that subscribers can access Add a description of the lists that appear in the category This description is to assist the data administr
171. edgements Check the box next to Send acknowledgement message to posting subscriber to have e mail messages sent to posters telling them that their mail has been received by the list and distributed to the list subscribers If this setting is changed while there are existing subscribers on the list their settings will not be affected Only those subscribers who join the list after the setting change will have the new setting The next tab Reply Behavior determines where any replies from subscribers are sent There are three options available Sender Replies are sent to the sender of the e mail message The sender address is the address based on the From field of the posting List Replies are sent back to the list If subscribers are not well informed that when they hit the reply key in their mail client their message goes to everyone they can post private or off topic messages back to the list by mistake Both Sender amp List Both parties receive replies Separate address Replies are sent to an address that is entered in the text box of this tab Figure 38 List Wizard for LISTSERV List Reply Behavior List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define which E Mail address will be used as the reply to address for postings distributed by the LISTSERV list Replies to List Postings Should Go To
172. edgements Check the box next to Send acknowledgement message to posting subscriber to have e mail messages sent to posters telling them that their mail has been received by the list and distributed to the list subscribers If this setting is changed while there are existing subscribers on the list their settings will not be affected Only those subscribers who join the list after the setting change will have the new setting The next tab Reply Behavior determines where any replies from subscribers are sent There are three options available e Sender Replies are sent to the sender of the e mail message The sender address is the address based on the From field of the posting e List Replies are sent back to the list If subscribers are not well informed that when they hit the reply key in their mail client their message goes to everyone they can post private or off topic messages back to the list by mistake e Both Sender amp List Both parties receive replies 52 e Separate address Replies are sent to an address that is entered in the text box of this tab Figure 50 List Wizard for LISTSERV List Reply Behavior List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define which E Mail address will be used as the reply to address for postings distributed by the LISTSERV list Replies to List Postin
173. ee Figure 110 15 4 2 Recipient Identification Columns In order to process an e mail job LISTSERV Maestro needs to know which column represents the recipients e mail addresses Use the drop down menus to select the E mail Column When additional recipient data is being used for mail merging it is possible to select the Name Column as well see Figure 109 This drop down menu will not appear when sending bulk e mail see Figure 110 114 15 4 3 Header Definition Headers are specially defined rows in databases Headers are used by database tables to label the columns of data so that the system and the user can correctly identify the columns Recipient data files containing a header will be sorted or parsed by LISTSERV Maestro based on that header row and the table reflected on the screen will have the columns labeled It is possible to edit the existing headers for an uploaded text file in order to make them easier to use in mail merging Changing the headers in LISTSERV Maestro will not change the headers in the original text file If the recipient data file does not contain a header it is possible to define a header within LISTSERV Maestro Header labels are limited to upper and lower case letters the numbers 0 9 and the underscore Any illegal characters in the headers will have to be changed before proceeding Before continuing to the next screen specify the E mail Column and the Name Column using the
174. eeasseesaeesaseesaseesaeeesaseeeasees 8 4 1 Recipient Datasets 4 eat en ee eee ey i a e 8 4 1 1 Creating a New Dataset csccicc ccccstnn narici irie oa iaado iiid eat 10 412 Greating a Lookup TaD E a r ra a a ar E r aa a ra a EEaren EAE iet 15 4 1 3 Editing Existing Datasets 2 c cceisesesedeetenesstessadedceeressaneetascdectpnsccesszdscderasroecnesiqandeetonedocerapnsccetesgecdereanese 17 Section 5 Introduction to Hosted Mailing Lists cccssesseesseeeseeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseeeneeaenseeseeeeeaeeaseeeesneeeaseasaeeeeesaenee 17 Section 6 Creating Hosted Recipient Lists ccccssecsseeeseeeseeeeseeeeneeeenseeeneeaeaseeeeseeeaseeeseeeeaseeeseeaseneeeseesaseeenseeeae 18 6 1 Hosted Recipient Mailing List Wizard o oo ee cceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeesneeeensaeeeseenaeeeenneeeeneaa 19 621 AGeneral Semtings EEE aces T Nes ov ee nectar Pbdecetesusecess isedevbraaacntsabcegevadescceestigcaavncstidecerssusdcatssoecdev rnete 19 G42 ProfiletFields 2 5 222 5 ac2he cote hcl se osha eds Desig eee ob acta Stl Woe had ee eh oh Be to hd Ah asi ot 20 6 123 Profile Field Dela S s a a E a a o La o hae sce asedecapasicedsnset vaasieed 21 Aa RSTO Tanan Le EERE E TEET 23 Section 7 Creating Hosted LISTSERV LiStS s sssnssunsennnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan nanna anneanne 25 7 1 Creating LISTSERV Announcement Lists siirsi gitiea iea iaia 26 7 1 1 General Settin
175. eeeeeeeneens 145 Glossary Of TOrmSisiaiccenicsceccescessecitircestetctuwe se annaa aaa aoa ra aana anaran AaS aak dawaam nanana 147 Appendix A Using Formulas in Hosted Recipient List Target GroupS ssssecsseesseeeseeeesseeeeeeeeneeeeseeeenseeeeeeee 149 Expressions iicaccavec e ae Soeia etl Gti aay eile ee ann are aod Sei eee he 149 OPEIALOMS coe elses LEA EE PE fe actin tes cute Se Leda ey cee ene decay cutee Me cad EAA E E E EAE 152 Automatic Tiype COnversionics a daeteet Msg a a a e ae e a e e EE 154 etaa n EEEE E E T EAT E E E EASA EE TEET 154 Appendix B About Comma Separated Files s cceseesseeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeates 167 Appendix C E mail and International Character Sets ccs ccsseceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeaeneeseeeeaseeeseeesaeeeeneeenseeeneeates 170 LISTSERV Maestro and International Character Sets 00 cc eccceeesneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeneeeeeeaaes 171 Appendix D Customizing Subscriber Access Templates cccsecsseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 173 Default Style Sheet vrir tee ee ees tent aed a Satta el ea 175 Appendix E Building Hosted Recipient Que ries cccsecssecseenseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenates 179 Editing the Condition Treeren e ices cba tee uetieg esse UR ce Sed dea coheed cini gute ey eden eaa 180 Combination Operator
176. eeeeeenteeenaaes 196 LISTSERV Maestro and Bi Directional Character Sets 0 0 ec eeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseneeeseenaes 197 Tables Table 1 Navigational CONS tec 3 ceive needs Retin eeeaiteden et hare ante eee beaded aes aa a E iea 3 Table 2 Features of Hosted Recipient Lists and Hosted LISTSERV Lists 000 0 cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 Table 3 Available Parameter Types for Select Statements 00 ee ecceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseneaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeenenaes 137 vii Preface What s New in LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 LISTSERV Maestro is a highly intuitive e mail marketing solution It provides organizations with an advanced tool to create send and track opt in personalized e mail messages The changes to LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 have been extensive adding data collection and storage to empower users to create and maintain clean opt in mailing lists This preface is a brief outline of the sweeping new features of LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 introduces powerful new abilities to collect manage save and reuse data from mailing list subscribers Data administration and mailing list creation now are combined in one interface to allow greater flexibility and control over personalized targeted opt in e mail messaging LISTSERV Maestro now can harness the flexibility and interactivity of traditional LISTSERV lists combined with the power of DBMS backing so that companies and
177. een used click on the link Specify details manually to configure the data manually Use the Specify details manually link when the delimiter Separator character or the quote character is used in some of the data fields For example if the USERNAME field contained Tom the cool cat Jones as an entry and double quotes happened to be the quote character for the file the details would have to be specified manually The same would be true if a field 74 named LOCATION contained the entry Atlanta GA where the comma was the separator character Figure 69 Upload Wizard Parse Manually Modify Recipient Dataset Members by Upload Source Parse Details Map Fields reared aunch Upload Es Parse Details The uploaded source file needs to be parsed correctly before the member information can be extracted The preview below shows the result of the parsing performed using the settings specified on this page Column Separator and Quote Character To be compatible to the dataset the uploaded file has to be encoded with the ISO 8859 1 encoding Specify how the columns in the file are separated Columns are separated by Comma Select a separator character from the drop down menu Specify if and how the columns in the file are enclosed Columns are not enclosed by a quote character Columns are enclosed by other off L asea lage a gad from the Use this link to have the system attempt to
178. elds of the dataset together with the profile fields of the hosted recipient list Click Add Field to add a new field to the list Click on the links next to the list field to select it for editing or to remove the field from the list Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field These fields LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field belong to the USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared fied dataset and SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field Cannot be DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field changed HL e Gaia ae nya areare from here produt Please select the XYZ titles you currently Multiple Select Optional Reset Remove Add Field Use this link to add a field to the list Click Next gt to continue 6 1 3 Profile Field Details The next screen in the wizard is Profile Field Details The profile field details screen has multiple tabs that toggle between the different settings for list profile fields The number and type of tabs depends on the types of data fields added to the list Lists containing selection fields have to assign the relevant lookup table to the field Click on the tab Selection Field Details to access the list of available lookup tables See Section 4 1 2 Creating a Lookup Table for more information 21 Figure 16 Hosted Recipient List
179. ember is subscribed to a list two new links become available in the Action column Edit Profile and Unsubscribe The edit profile link will open any list specific profile fields that can then be changed and saved The unsubscribe link removes the member from the mailing list but does not remove the member from the membership area dataset 10 2 2 Subscribing from a List URL Each list has its own web subscription form If this form is made accessible to everyone subscribers can fill out the form and subscribe to a list There are two steps to this process The first step requires a valid e mail address and a password LISTSERV Maestro checks to see if the e mail address is already a member of the lists dataset If so the dataset s profile fields will be automatically filled in leaving only the list specific fields if any to be filled in by the subscriber If the subscriber is not a member of the dataset the mandatory dataset fields will have to be filled in along with any mandatory list specific fields 83 Figure 78 Subscribing from a List URL Subscribe to NEWS FROM Join our news list for XYZ customers Breaking news for users and developers such as upgrades and bug fixes will be annoucened here New product release schedules and calls for beta testers will also be distributed Step 1 E mail Address and Password E mail Address TES Password Continue with Step 2 Step 2 Profile The address you have entered i
180. embled from by appending the fields in the given order with a separating space between each No additional input validation is required Profile Fields Full Name Fields USERNAME lt Optional gt FNAME lt Mandatory gt LNAME lt Mandatory gt Use the arrows to move the profile fields Move Up into the name fields Move Down column Name Display Name Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean n a shared field Leave unchecked for text mail PERMISSION Can we quote you in our newsletter Check Boolean n a box for yes Click Next gt to continue 7 2 4 List Type for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The next screen in the wizard is List type Use the option buttons to select Unmoderated Discussion List e Unmoderated Discussion List This type of list is used for two way communication Subscribers are allowed to post to the list directly List postings are not reviewed by a moderator or editor 40 Figure 36 LISTSERV List Wizard List Type LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field General Fields Details List Type
181. enes In order for characters from an alphabet to be converted into bits for transmission and then converted back into the message the bits have to be arranged into sequences representing each character in the alphabet Matching the bit sequences to alphabetical characters is called mapping Mapping bit sequences to alphabets has resulted in several different so called character sets short charsets that have been defined and standardized by the international community In the English speaking world probably the most widely used charset is ASCII sometimes also called US ASCII which is a charset that maps 7 bit sequences to the 26 characters from the Latin alphabet Because 7 bits have enough room for 128 characters 0 127 there are more than the 26 Latin characters in the ASCII charset First each character appears twice as upper case and lower case then there are the ten digits 0 9 various punctuation marks like comma dot semi colon colon dash slash backslash exclamation question mark and so forth There are also other characters that can act as control characters that is characters that have special meaning to certain protocols such as and amp Used almost as frequently at least in the western world are the charsets from the ISO 8859 family These charsets map 8 bit sequences to letters digits and characters from various European languages Hebrew and Arabic Since the ISO 8859 charsets
182. ent select email_address f_name 1_name age gender from mae_recipients where interestl modelnum Parameter Details Parameter modelnum Label Enter the model number here Description IES eed optional Input Type Edit Field Single Value ha Validation rule to apply on the e Fi input values Restrict value s to integer numbers Allow free text input Restrict value s to floating point numbers Restrict value s to integer numbers Figure 131 Parameter Type Edit Field Single Value End User s View Define Recipients Options Source Source Details Cancel lt Back Next Input Values for Target Group Parameters Enter values for all parameters of the selected target group Enter the model number here 18 2 3 Parameter Type Selection List This parameter type appears as a selection list with multiple entries on the end user s screen If the parameter is in an in clause the list is rendered as a multi line list field and the end user 139 may select multiple entries by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key Otherwise the list is rendered as a drop down list and the end user may select only a single entry For parameters where LISTSERV Maestro selects from a database the entries in the selection list can be specified in two ways They can be specified manually on this wizard screen or a SQL statement can specify them The SQL statement w
183. ent definition SQL Statement SELECT with replaced sample parameter values EMAIL_ADDRESS AS EMAIL F_NAME AS FIRSTNAME FNAME L_NAME AS FULLNAME INTEREST AS MODELNO INTEREST2 AS PET INTEREST4 AS OWN_OR_RENT INTERESTS AS NEWS_SOURCE AGE EMAIL_TYPE FROM mae_recipients WHERE STATE IN VA PA FL AND EMAIL_TYPE h AND l 1 OR EMAIL_TYPE t AND 0 1 AND AGE BETWEEN 15 AND 75 E mail Column EMAIL contains valid e mail addresses Name Column FULLNAME Usage of Recipients Data Used for mail merging and tracking Duplicate Elimination Selected Duplicate Elimination Use my list of columns to determine duplicates Recipients Sample EMAIL FIRSTNAME FULLNAME MODELNO PET OWN_OR_RENT NEWS_SOURCE AGE EMAIL_TYPE Mirjam maestro demo lsoft com Mirjam Mirjam McIntosh 8787 fish rent ty T2 p Lisa maestro demo lsoft com Lisa Lisa Lopez 5454 other rent ty 55 H temp5 cherry ease lsoft com Mark Mark Ryder 8787 cat none none 18 h temp8 cherry ease soft com Lupe Lupe Medina 8787 other own newspaper 30 h Mirjam maestro demoa lsoft com Mirjam Mirjam McIntosh 8787 fish rent ty 72 p Lisa maestro demo lsoft com Lisa Lisa Lopez 5454 other rent ty 55 h temp5 cherry ease lsoft com Mark Mark Ryder 8787 cat none none 18 h temp8 cherry ease lsoft com Lupe Lupe Medina 8787 other own newspaper 30 h Click Finish to complete the target group and return to the Recipient Target Groups screen 128 Section 1
184. erators for Number Operands The following operators require both operand expressions to be of type number Addition operator sum of both operands Subtraction operator difference of both operands Multiplication operator product of both operands Integer Division operator integer quotient of both operands Modulo operator remainder of integer division of both operands Note In LISTSERV Maestro the division is strictly an integer division Any decimal places in the result are discarded they are not rounded off but simply ignored Operators for Text Operands The following operators require both operand expressions to be of type text Concatenation operator appends both operands The concatenation operator takes the two text operands and simply appends the text string on the right hand to the end of the text string on the left hand The result is two strings concatenated together The character is used both to denote the addition operator for number operands as well as the concatenation operator for text operands So if a appears anywhere in the formula LISTSERV Maestro must first determine if in this context the addition or the concatenation operator is meant It simply does so by looking at the operands If both operands are of type number then the is interpreted as the addition operator and the result will be of type number too If at least o
185. ers from changing their settings while the system is temporarily closed Click the Finish button to save all the settings of the dataset and return to the recipient dataset details screen For more information on membership areas see Section 10 Members Join a Dataset Themselves For information on customizing the membership area see Section 11 Subscriber Access URLs and Customization 14 Figure 9 Recipient Dataset Definition Wizard Summary Recipient Dataset Definition General Profile Fields Profile Field Details Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the settings of the dataset Set the member area access level and then click Finish to accept the changes Click Cancel to exit without saving your changes Public Member Area Access Access for members only z Select the access level Open to everyone A for memb ccess I Closed for maintenance A No public a General Settings Dataset Name XYZ Company Dataset Description XYZ Customer Center Profile Fields Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared String length between field 3 and 15 SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional sha
186. ese entries will be used for delivery the others will be ignored e Use my list of columns to determine duplicates If the list of recipients retrieved by the SQL query contains entries with the same values in all of the columns selected in the column list below this option they will be considered duplicates Only the first of instance of each will be used for delivery the others will be ignored Select the columns that will be considered for this comparison from the list Use SHIFT and CTRL to select multiple entries 125 The recipient sample at the bottom of the screen is displayed to make it easier to understand the contents of each column This will assist with deciding which columns to be considered for comparison and which not to be considered Figure 120 Target Group Wizard Duplicate Elimination Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Duplicate Elimination Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Duplicate Elimination To avoid sending double messages to the same recipient use this page to remove duplicates from your recipient data Duplicate Elimination Options C Do not remove duplicates C Remove duplicates with the same e mail address Use my list of columns to determine duplicates a FNAME LNAME Recipient Sample FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demoa soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n
187. eseaaeeeseeeaeeeenaeesenaeeeseeaeees 50 7 3 5 List Options for Moderated Discussion LiStS ieee ee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeesnaeesenaeeeseenaeees 51 7 3 6 Posting Restrictions for Moderated Discussion Lists 00 0 0 eeecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseneaeees 54 7 3 7 Topics for Moderated Discussion LiStS 00 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeesneeesenaeeesennaeees 56 7 3 8 Summary for Moderated Discussion Lists ccc eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeenaeesenaeeesenaeens 58 Section 8 OrganiZing Datasets vciicccciciscciecccccescccsnsscnceeecncectueeseccerdeessnctentecesieectuecesaieceentevdeceneeieceectbeeineeesenevencneenscensen 59 Section 9 Adding and Maintaining Dataset Members and List Subscribers ccsseeccssseeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeseee 60 9 1 Managing Members of a Dataset and List Subscribers 20 0 eee ce enee ee eneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeaaes 61 e aa A Filtering Members EEEE E aus teove cee T das bar ceases lavbenneceudebad beens sees 64 9 2 Adding a Single Member sis sic en e a a ni ecde Act Ai ee aa aa cee cari aaa aasi 67 9 3 Modifying Members by Upload 0 0 0 ee eeseceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeseeeaeeesneeeeseaeeeseneeeeesneeeeneaaes 68 9 3 1 The Upload WIZar ics etis ce avethccececlte cae Ae a elds gehts deceit aea Aa deed ide adits ce aa Liskov aiana 68
188. essa Note In the interest of keeping this document shorter a screen shot of Mapping Details for a dataset is not included Click Next gt to continue if there are no other tabs to set mapping details for or if each tab has a green checkmark 9 3 1 7 Launch Upload The last screen in the upload wizard Launch Upload summarizes the options for the upload Use the lt Back button to return to the previous screen or any of the links in the navigation bar to return to a previous screen to change selections Click the Launch button to upload the file and modify the dataset or list An Operations in Progress bar will display until the upload and modification are completed Results of the modification will be displayed Download any unprocessed rows by using the download links 79 Figure 73 Upload Wizard Upload Results Statistics Upload Subscribers Result Statistics List Subscribers File Source File X ZCompany2 csy Total rows 38 Upload Options Modification Type Add to List Type Details If a new subscriber is not yet a member of the dataset add it as a new dataset member Results Subscribers added to the list 26 Unprocessed subscriber rows 12 Details of Unprocessed Rows Download any unprocessed rows from the data file in a zipped file format before clicking OK If you want to keep the information about the failed suBstfibers download the corresponding files Note This i
189. et and operators that select specific recipients based on what data is in their fields Multiple fields of data can be used along with combined operators to fine tune which messages are sent to specific sets of recipients Selecting conditions and operators builds the query that is submitted to the dataset to pull recipients from the dataset Like other queries in the target group wizard they can be parameterized so that end users can fill in the details of the selection criteria See Section 18 Defining Parameters for more information The Source Details screen defaults to opening with an AND operator in place after the list name To set a list subscriber condition it is possible to change the operator add a condition add a job based condition add a combination operator or copy a combination operator As operators and conditions are selected a diagram displays the selections and the query is displayed below Click on the link Actions on Selected Node to select an action type e Change Operator Type Changes the operator type Select the operator from the drop down menu and then click OK to accept the change or Cancel to disregard the selection Available operators are Combines with AND Combines with OR Combines with AND then negate the result Combines with OR then negate the result For more information on how operators act see Appendix E Building Hosted Recipient Queries 94 e Add Condition Adds a condi
190. et groups sending special list messages to lists with conditions that have parameters may have one or more parameters to arrange and describe Concise descriptions and intuitive layouts make using target groups easier for regular users Figure 98 Input Layout for LISTSERV Lists with Parameters in Conditions Target Group Definition Recipients Details Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Input Layout Specify how the input parameters are presented to the user You may add headings and optional introductory text to help the user select the correct parameter input value Input Details Click up or down to move click New Heading to Enter a heading for the parameter Add optional text create a new heading click Delete Heading to remove to provide more information about the parameter an existing heading Click Save Entry to accept the changes Heading HTML Messaging Optional Text Add any additional descriptive text here Software Development software Software mail_type Check for HTML mail Change the order of the parameters using the Up and Down links New Heading Delete Heading Save Entry Add a new heading or delete an existing one Click Next gt to continue 14 6 Input Preview The Input Preview screen reveals how the target group will appear to regul
191. ets containing selection fields has to assign the relevant lookup table to the field Figure 7 Recipient Dataset Definition Wizard Profile Field Details Selection Filed Details Dataset Definition General Profile Fields Profile Field Details Summary ee Save amp Exit lt Back reez Profile Field Details Specify the details for the profile fields Selection Field Details Input Field validation The list below contains all profile fields of type Single Select or Multiple Select Please select the lookup table for each of these fields Lookup Table xyz Products departments download test list transportation Field types Tex and Number can have set validation limits entered so that when the fields are filled in by members only certain types of input will be accepted For example in the column DOB see Figure 8 a date of birth is requested By setting a validation setting of a date with format only dates entered using the specified format will be accepted Figure 8 Recipient Dataset Definition Wizard Profile Field Details Input Filed Validation Dataset Definition General Profile Fields Profile Field Details Summar Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt _Save amp Exit_ _s Back Next gt Profile Field Details Specify the details for the profile fields Selection Field Details Input Field Validation The
192. ext Add any additional descriptive text here Click up or down to move click New Heading to create a new heading click Delete Heading to remove an existing heading Demographics statesel State minage Age between d html HTML text Text New Heading Delete Headi Save Entry Add a new heading or delete an existing one Click Next gt to continue 16 5 Input Preview The next screen in the target group wizard is called Input Preview The screen will appear as it would to regular users who are selecting recipients using this target group in the define recipients wizard Use this screen to verify order labels descriptions parameter types and values If the order of the parameters needs to be changed click the lt Back button If labels or descriptions need to be changed click the Parameters link in the top links bar to re enter the Parameters screen When the Input Preview screen is displayed any SQL statements that are required to determine the values of single selection or multiple selection lists are executed By executing the SQL statements the drop down lists or multi line lists are filled in with values that can be selected Using the selections lists checkboxes input fields and or date fields make selections for each parameter type Click Next gt to continue 122 Figure 117 Target Group Wizard Input Preview Target Group
193. ferent meanings in its uppercase or lowercase version Each pattern letter has a specific presentation in the created final string during formatting or in the parsed string during parsing For example presentation types may be Text Number Year or similar More details about the presentations and their meanings follow below 163 Commonly Used Pattern Letters Letter Date or Time Component Presentation Examples y Year Year 1996 96 M Month in year Month July Jul 07 d Day in month Number 10 E Weekday Text Tuesday Tue H Hour in day 0 23 Number 0 h Hour in am pm 1 12 Number 12 m Minute in hour Number 30 s Second in minute Number 55 S Millisecond Number 978 a Am pm marker Text PM Special Pattern Letters Letter Date or Time Component Presentation Examples G Era designator Text AD BC D Day in year Number 189 w Calendar week in year Number 27 W Calendar week in month Number 2 F Weekday ordinal in month Number 2 k Hour in day 1 24 Number 24 K Hour in am pm 0 11 Number 0 Z Time zone General time zone Pacific Standard Time PST GMT 08 00 Z Time zone RFC 822 time zone 0800 Note The value of calendar week in year and calendar week in month depends on the locale that is used The locale determines the conventions about which weekday is interpreted as the first day of
194. file on a local drive select it and click OK Once there are items listed in the lookup table they can be edited deleted moved up or moved down in the list Use the adjacent links to change the item in the table Click OK to accept the entries in the lookup table and return to previous screen From here the Actions link can be used to edit the name and description of the lookup table edit the items in the list download the items in the list or delete the table altogether 16 Figure 12 Edit Lookup Table Entries Edit Lookup Table Entries Entries of Lookup Table Countries Use this page to edit the entries of a lookup table You are editing the entries of the value list Countries which is not used currently by any recipient datasets and or mailing lists Click on the edit link next to the lookup table entry in the list below to select it for editing Click on the delete link to delete the entry Click Add New Entry to create a new entry ve United States Edit Default value for no choice Afghanistan Edit Delete Move Down Use these Albania Edit Delete Move Up Move Down links to edit Algeria Edit Delete Move Up Move Down delete or Andorra Edit Delete Move Up Move Down MOVE the Angola Edit Delete Move Up Move Down items in the Antigua and Barbuda Edit Delete Move Up Move Down table Argentina Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Armenia Edit Delete Move Up Move Down Austr
195. filter 35 of 35 subscribers Delete Use these page navigation links to view subscribers 15 per page all r EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE HTML USERTYPE Topics T ignore ignore Bob maestro demo lsoft com Bob Bouchard look up 99 3 F PARENTS MATH Chuck maestro demo lsoft com Chuck Cho rock music al 1983 if F DEVELOPERS MUSIC MATH Darren maestro demo lsoft com Darren Donagel beam me up 2 1960 F T CHILDREN ART Evelyn maestro demo lsoft com Evelyn Eavensong midnite 12 al 1950 F T INSTRUCTORS ART MUSIC MATH Frank maestro demo soft com Frank Fortuna lucky 1964 T T PARENTS ART LANGUAGE Gina maestro dema soft com Gina Gallino italian fil78 3 IE F INSTRUCTORS ART LANGUAGE Hilda maestro demo lsoft com Hilda Hines catch me now 2 1972 T F CHILDREN Ines maestro demo lsoft com Ines Ito pack rat6 1974 T F DEVELOPERS INSTRUCTORS PARENTS Jocelyne maestro demo lsoft com Jocelyne Jones dow joney 3 F F INSTRUCTORS ART LANGUAGE Ken maestro demo lsoft com Ken Kawasowi hotrod62 2 1962 F T DEVELOPERS MATH Lisa maestro demo lsoft com Lisa Lopez sky88 3 1984 T F INSTRUCTORS MUSIC MATH Mirjam maestro demo lsoft com Mirjam McIntosh apple pie 1969 T T PARENTS Other Nancy maestro demo lsoft com Nancy Nelson nelly 2 1982 T F INSTRUCTORS PARENTS CHILDREN Odette maestro demo lsoft com Odette Owi leap frog T F INSTRUCTORS ART Pat maestro demo lsoft com Pat Pascal munchin foo 2 1978 1 T INSTRUCTORS LANGUAGE 9 1 1 Editing a
196. floating point Here the entire placeholder but not the enclosing quotes is replaced The example becomes city New York and the value may be any string Any occurrences of the quote character itself in the value will automatically be escaped For example a placeholder is defined as lastname name and a last name of O Brian occurs within a row value of O Brian After replacement the resulting data would automatically become lastname O Brian or whatever escape of the quote character is the correct one for the database in use Do not define values with quote characters already escaped since that would lead to a double escaped character Placeholders in in clauses require special attention An in clause is a SQL construct that allows an OR comparison with a range of values Instead of writing Value x or value y or value z itis possible to write value in x y z enumerating the possible values in a comma separated list within parenthesis To parameterize this use a placeholder instead of this comma separated list as with value in arg orin the quoted form value in arg Both forms are very similar The placeholder will be replaced with a comma separated list representing all choices the user makes Do not include a whole list of placeholders but 136 only a single placeholder This single placeholder is then be replaced by the list of the choices the user makes e f t
197. for a mail job If regular users do not have the right to use that recipient definition the data administrator will have to create a target group based on the hosted LISTSERV list See Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups for instructions Regular users need a target group to be able to send mail to hosted recipients lists Whenever a hosted recipient list is created and at least one subscriber is added LISTSERV Maestro automatically creates a corresponding target group that encompasses all the current subscribers of that list This target group is placed within a special target group category called lt Hosted Recipients Lists Target Group gt The data administrator must enable this target group for use before any mail can be sent to the hosted recipient list See Section 13 Hosted Recipient List Target Groups for instructions Section 11 Subscriber Access URLs and Customization One of the final steps in the process of setting up a Recipient Warehouse to collect organize and manage recipient data and e mail lists is providing people with access to the membership and list subscription areas LISTSERV Maestro automatically generates URLs to all of the public pages of a dataset as each dataset and the lists within it are created These URLs can then be copied onto a web site or sent in an e mail message in order to invite members and subscribers 84 to join Subscriber access URLs can be found by clicking the Subs
198. form or other means to gather recipient data and populate the database is also necessary This may entail HTML coding and scripting depending on the individual needs of each organization Once a source for collecting recipients and recipient data is established and connected to LISTSERV Maestro regular users need a simple means of selecting recipients and creating personalized messages The data administrator can build and save reusable and parameterized queries within LISTSERV Maestro called recipients target groups Regular account holders can then use these target groups to select the recipients for their jobs from a variety of places including external databases internal hosted lists uploaded text files and more The data administrator builds the recipient target groups by writing SQL statements to retrieve data from a data source The data administrator also designs the methods regular users employ to select the data in a series of check boxes drop down menus and or text boxes There are many advantages to using recipient target groups e Using recipient data stored in a database can save time and system resources e The database can be continually updated until the time the job is sent ensuring that the most current data is used for the job e Recipient target groups are shared among group members and can be reused for multiple jobs e Parameters can be inserted into recipient target groups so that regular account holders have
199. format and the result displayed below the input field For example if month2 day2 year4 hour2 min2 sec2 is entered as the format then the sample will display 09 01 2002 08 04 06 The input from the end user will be applied to the format string entered in the same way as with the sample date and the resulting string will be used to replace the parameter placeholder All 143 occurrences of the quote character in the date time string will be escaped before the replacement Figure 135 Parameter Type Date and or Time Data Administrator s View Parameters Enter the necessary details input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing SQL Statement select email_address f_name 1_name gender age interestl opt_im_date from mae_recipients where opt_in_ date lt date Parameter Details Parameter date Label enter the optin date Description a optional Input Type Date and or Time x Specify how the date time input will look for the user Date Input Format Month Day Year z Time Input Format none z Specify how the date time value is converted into a database readable format Enter the conversion format using any separators and other characters the format requires using the placeholders shown next to the input field They will be replaced with the corres
200. from which the substring will be extracted startindex Type Number The beginning index inclusive zero based The third argument is optional endindex Type Number The ending index exclusive zero based Examples Substring original text 5 Substring original 3 3 amp VALUE 158 ToDate ToDate datevalue formatpattern localename Function Returns a formatted representation of a numerical date time value The formatted representation is usually returned as text but may also be returned as a number if applicable The format that is used to create the representation is specified with the given format argument Return Type Usually Text However may be Number if the result can be expressed as a number datevalue Type Number ea cet PER The date time value to ae Note For formatting purposes LISTSERV Maestro uses format Must Conan he the U S locale and the time zone of the server where the desired date time F LUI component is running by default Locale text like represented aS milliseconds weekday names names of months etc will be formatted Since Jan 1 1970 using the U S locale Similarly times will be formatted 00 00 00 GMT for example using the server s time zone from ne gurput onne functions To specify a different locale use the optional parameter CUT eee w 8 localename to choose a predefined
201. g Size Message Limits Handling of Attachments C Accept postings even if they contain attachments Accept postings but remove all attachments Reject postings if they contain attachments e Size Message Limits Sets a size limit for each message posted to the list The size can be limited by the number of lines in the message the number of kilobits KB or the number of megabits MB of the message The total number of messages allowed to be posted to the list for the day can be set as well as the total number of postings per user per day Fields left blank will have no limitations imposed 33 Figure 30 LISTSERV List Wizard Size and Message Limits Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Attachment Handling Size Message Limits Size Message Limits The following settings specify limits for the data that is sent to the list Leave a field empty to set the limit to unlimited Limit each message to lines 3 lines Maximum postings allowed per day for whole list KB MB Maximum postings allowed per day for each user 7 1 7 Topics for LISTSERV Announcement Lists Large active LISTSERV lists often use sub groups within the list to give subscribers the opportunity to receive only the posts to the list they are most interested in reading Sub groups are created in LISTSERV by defining the keywor
202. g for LISTSERV Announcement List ee eee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeesenaeens 26 7 1 2 Profile Fields for LISTSERV Announcement LiSt eee ecceeceeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 27 7 1 3 Profile Field Details for LISTSERV Announcement List ec cee cence eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseenaeeseneaeees 28 7 1 4 List Type for LISTSERV Announcement List ee eeecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesneeeseeaeeeeeeaeees 29 7 1 5 List Options for LISTSERV Announcement LiSts 0 cc eecceeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeesneeeeseaeeseenaeees 30 7 1 6 Posting Restrictions for LISTSERV Announcement Lists 00 ce eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeneaeees 33 7 1 7 Topics for LISTSERV Announcement Lists 0 00 0 cece cece ee eeneeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseneaeeesnaeeeessaeeeseeaeees 34 7 1 8 Summary for LISTSERV Announcement Lists 0 0 eee eeeeceeeenneeeeeeneeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeesnaeeeeeenaesenaeees 35 7 2 Creating LISTSERV Unmoderated Discussion Lists eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeesnneeeeenteeeneaaes 37 7 2 1 General Settings for Unmoderated Discussion Lists 0 ec eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeesneeeenenaeeseenaeees 37 7 2 2 Profile Fields for Unmoderated Discussion Lists ccccccccseeseseeeecececeeneececeeeceaueaseeeeeeseaaeseeeeeseeeneeaueaeness 38 7 2 3 Profile F
203. g text see above e Multiple Select Field Filtering Fields based on multiple selection menus cannot be filtered e Topics Field Filtering LISTSERV lists that contain topics cannot be filtered using the special topics field that is displayed when browsing the list members 9 2 Adding a Single Member The data administrator can add members to a dataset or subscribers to a list one at a time This is the fastest way to add someone directly to a specific dataset or list It is important to have the necessary data for each addition To add a single member to a dataset 1 Select the dataset 2 Click the Add Single Member link from the actions menu 3 Fill in all the fields marked with an asterisk 4 Optionally fill in any other fields 5 Click OK The member will be added to the dataset Members added to a dataset are not automatically added to any lists in that dataset set To add or change information at the dataset level use the Browse Edit Confirmed Members link in the actions menu To add a single subscriber to a list 1 Select the list 2 Click the Add Single Subscriber link from the actions menu 3 Enter the e mail address of the new subscriber in the edit box 4 Click OK 6 If the address is not already a member of the dataset fill in all the mandatory fields for the dataset and the mandatory fields for the list If the e mail address already is a member of the dataset the dataset fields will already be
204. ges It is likely that these international names would be encoded using a different charset than the text of the message It is important to consider what happens when merging these names into the English body text The effect that the chosen charset has on the merge values depends on the kind of recipients definition selected for a particular job If recipients are uploaded as a text file based on the reaction of a previous job or are selected from a database by the Maestro User Interface then all recipients and their merge values are already known to the Maestro User Interface before the job is submitted to LISTSERV for delivery LISTSERV Maestro can therefore encode each merge value with the same charset that is used for the e mail text Consequently if the values are later merged into the text their charset will match that of the text However if a merge value contains a character that cannot be displayed in the charset chosen for the text then this character will be replaced with a question mark during the encoding and this question mark will appear in the mail that reaches the recipient to which the merge value belongs In the example described above where the message body was in plain text and the recipient list was composed of recipient names from all over the world a problem could occur because LISTSERV Maestro chooses the charset based on the message text not on the recipient values If the mail text itself is plain English the
205. group wizard is engaged for a new target group definition be sure and click Save amp Exit to save all previous work on the target group if it is necessary to close the wizard before the Summary screen is reached 16 6 Recipients Details The Recipients Details screen specifies how the headers from the recipient data will be used It is necessary to decide whether additional data will be used for mail merging and tracking define which column contains the e mail address and to edit the column headers if necessary The Recipients Details screen is split into three sections to accommodate the data administrator 16 6 1 Usage of Recipients Data LISTSERV Maestro needs to know if additional recipient data will be used for mail merging and tracking or whether this information is to be ignored and the job sent as bulk e mail If the Use additional recipient data for mail merging and tracking option button is selected columns from the text file or database can be used in the e mail message to create personalized messages These columns can then also be used to identify recipients for more detailed tracking reports For more information on using mail merging see the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual Section 5 6 Merge Fields and Conditional Blocks 123 If the gnore additional recipient data and send job as bulk e mail option button is selected any additional columns that were uploaded with the file or that appear in the databa
206. gs Should Go To Sender according to the From address in the posting List as a new posting c C Both Sender amp List c Separate Address The next tab Bounce Handling determines what happens to the subscriber addresses when messages sent to them bounce are rejected from the e mail server and returned to the sender undeliverable LISTSERV lists can handle bounces by removing the subscriber addresses of bounced messages automatically or by collecting bounces for manual action Manually processed bounces are sent to the list administrator Select one of the three available the bounce processing options e Remove immediately after first bounce The address that bounced the mail will be removed from the list after the first bounce Subscribers will have to be re added to the list to receive any additional mail e Remove subscribers after X bounces within X days Enter the number of bounces that are permitted in the first text box and the number days they can occur over in the second box This setting is more flexible than the first setting in that if the reason for the bounce is temporary such as a full mailbox the message can be sent again within the set number of days Subscribers will not be removed from the list if the message can be delivered within the set number of allowable bounces and days e Collect bounces for manual processing Bounce addresses will be sent to a specific ad
207. gs sent to the list They then decide to approve the messages sending them through to the list or reject them preventing them from being sent to the list If there are multiple moderators the list postings are sent to all moderators The first moderator to take action approving or rejecting the message will determine how the message is handled in regards to the list 47 The editors are those addresses that are allowed to send messages to the list without requiring moderation The list administrator address is always allowed to send mail to the list without moderation and if no additional editor addresses are added the list administrator automatically becomes the moderator so that all messages sent to the list will go to that address for approval or rejection 7 3 1 General Settings for Moderated Discussion Lists The first screen General defines the general information pertaining to the list e Name This is the name of the mailing list Subscribers will see this name of the list on the web form when they subscribe Data administrators will see the list name in the dataset tree see Figure 58 and if they create a target group from a classic LISTSERV list see Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups for details Regular users will see the list name if they are allowed to define recipients for a job using by sending to an Existing LISTSERV List e Internal Description The internal description is seen by users w
208. hange the currently defined topic im a LANGUAGE lt new gt MUSIC lt new gt MATH lt new gt im a m a Add a new topic with this link 7 1 8 Summary for LISTSERV Announcement Lists The Summary screen displays all the selections made for the LISTSERV list during its creation Use the lt Back button or any of the links in the top bar to revisit any page in the wizard to make changes As long as there are no subscribers the list settings can be edited from the Recipient Dataset Details screen by selecting the list and clicking the Actions link Before the list can be used its access level needs to be set The list can be set to be accessible to anyone wishing to subscribe to be accessible to only list subscribers or to have no public access If a list is accessible to everyone it will appear on the membership area Web page to anyone visiting that page If the list is accessible only to members the list will not appear in the membership area to everyone it will only appear only to those who are subscribed to the list This essentially closes the list to those who wish to sign themselves up and leaves adding subscribers to the LISTSERV Maestro users while allowing existing subscribers to manage their own settings Lists with no public access do not appear in the membership area to anyone 35 Figure 32 LISTSERV List Wizard Summary LISTSERY List Definition Profi
209. hared among group members and can be reused for multiple jobs e Parameters can be inserted into recipient target groups so that regular account holders have some control over what recipients are retrieved for each job Using parameters reduces the number of individual queries that need to be written for jobs e The data administrator does not need to be involved with any other parts of e mail jobs e Specific recipient target groups can be removed from use without deleting them They can be reinstated whenever desired e Recipient target groups can be organized into categories for easy recognition 12 1 Creating Recipient Target Groups To create recipient target groups the data administrator must first log into his her account Recipient target groups are created and saved under the Recipient Warehouse icon in the Maestro User Interface Click on the icon Recipient Warehouse icon to open Administer the recipient warehouse Click on Recipient Target Groups to open the Recipient Target Groups screen This screen lists all defined target groups if any and provides a wizard to create new target groups 88 Figure 82 Recipient Target Groups Recipients Target Groups All defined target groups for your account Category lt No Category gt z LISTSERY selects Copy Delete Target Group Type LISTSERV Retrieves Recipients from Database Description testing LISTSERV selects from a database Status
210. hat act like folders to help organize the lists for users and subscribers alike Categories and the lists they contain are displayed in the left frame of the Recipient Dataset Details screen LISTSERV Maestro can create two different types of mailing list hosted recipient lists and hosted LISTSERV lists Each list type is denoted with its own icon style in the dataset so it can be easily identified There are different features and functionality for each type of list Deciding what the purposes are of the mailing lists in a dataset will help determine which type of list is best to create Depending on the types of fields in the dataset it is possible to have both types of list in one dataset 17 Important Note If there are selection menus in a dataset it will not be possible to create hosted LISTSERV lists in that dataset In order to have both types of list in a dataset selection fields can be added to the individual hosted recipient list instead Table 2 Features of Hosted Recipient Lists and Hosted LISTSERV Lists Hosted Recipient List Features Hosted LISTSERV List Features Easy to use and no extra set up involving Requires extra setup within LISTSERV so that LISTSERV LISTSERV is required knows how to access the LISTSERV Maestro database Allows subscriber data fields where the Provides the special features of LISTSERV lists subscriber can select values from a drop down Discussion lists menu select one
211. he dataset in the file will become the exact data in the dataset Adds any new members found in the file and updates values for existing 68 members found in the file Any existing members not included in the file will be deleted from the dataset as well as and from any lists they are subscribed to Remove from dataset Removes members listed in the file from the dataset as well as from any lists they are subscribed to The file has only to contain the e mail addresses of those members to be deleted all other columns are ignored When modifying subscribers for a list the values for the dataset are included The available modifications for lists are Add to List Adds new subscribers to the list All existing subscribers are left unchanged Update in List Updates the existing subscribers with the values found in the file Does not add any new subscribers to the list Synchronize with List This is a combination of the add and update functions Adds any new subscribers found in the file and updates values for existing subscribers found in the file Full Synchronize with List The list data in the file will become the exact data in the list Adds any new subscribers found in the file and updates values for existing subscribers found in the file Any existing subscribers not included in the file will be deleted from the lists Subscribers removed from the list will not be removed from the dataset Remove from List
212. he dataset should contain all data fields that are shared by multiple lists so that the subscriber does not have to enter or update the same information in several places Data fields that are specific to a single list should be in that list Careful consideration should be given to limiting the number of data fields that the subscriber must enter subscribers faced with several pages worth of data entry fields may decide that they are not that interested in subscribing after all gt Important From the technical point of view one choice that must be decided before creating the dataset is whether there will ever be a need to support traditional LISTSERV lists LISTSERV lists currently have two restrictions there must be at least one mandatory name field and there cannot be any selection menus in the base dataset or in the list data for the LISTSERV list Section 4 The Recipient Warehouse The Recipient Warehouse is LISTSERV Maestro s name for and method of creating storing and retrieving data within the system Every group or single user account has its own recipient warehouse that is the repository for recipient datasets lookup tables and recipient target groups Click on the Recipient Warehouse icon on the home page to open the warehouse From there select Recipient Datasets or Recipient Target Groups to begin working with recipient data Creating and administering recipient target groups is covered beginning in Section 12 I
213. he non quoted form is chosen then the choices are also not quoted so they must be integer values If the quoted form is chosen then all choices will be quoted each one separately and any quotes appearing in a choice value will automatically be escaped e Here are some e Assume valu and 412 This will result in a replacement like this Value in arg and that the user selected the choices Assume last Miller O examples e in name in lastname in arg and that the user selected the choices 1 5 23 1 5 23 412 Brian and Wagner This will result in a replacement like this Miller 0 Brian Wagner e Two placeholders that have the same parameter name must also have the same integer non integer type You cannot define an integer parameter and use the same parameter name for a non integer parameter or vice versa e Two placeholders that have the same parameter name must also have the same in clause non in clause type You cannot define a parameter inside of an in clause and use the same parameter name for a parameter outside of an in clause or vice versa 18 2 Available Parameter Types There are four basic parameter types check box edit field selection list and date and or time Each parameter type is only available for certain types of select statements Table summarizes which parameter types are available for which kinds of statements Table 3 Av
214. he same number of separator characters is present in every line of the file e Having two separator characters in direct succession without any characters in between creates an empty column e Ifa line begins with the separator character then LISTSERV Maestro assumes the line begins with an empty column e Ifa line ends with the separator character then LISTSERV Maestro assumes the line ends with an empty column e Ifthe character that is used as the separator character also appears as part of the value of one or several of the column fields then it is necessary to enclose the fields in quotation marks or another quote character e Any character can be used as the quote character quotation marks or apostrophe are conventional except for the separator character e The same character must be used for the opening quote and for the closing quote If quotes are used in some records in a file especially records that appear near the end of the file it is important to manually define the separator and quote character instead of allowing LISTSERV Maestro to attempt to parse the file automatically By manually defining the separator and quote characters LISTSERV Maestro is forced to look at the entire file and parse it according to the values entered for these characters If LISTSERV Maestro attempts to parse the file automatically when it contains quote characters in some lines but not all those records may be parsed incorrectly o
215. he text string to search in searchtext Type Text The string to search for The third argument is optional startindex Type Number The character position at which the search shall be started If not given the search will always start at the first character index 0 Examples IndexOf a longer text lo IndexOf abc def abc def abc 4 Length Function Returns the length of the given text string the Return Type Number number of characters in the text Arguments text Type Text The text whose length shall be determined Examples Length a longer text lo Length amp FULL_NAME Max Function Returns the greatest of all given number Return Type Number arguments Max argl arg2 yr BLOG ay eas 7 argN Arguments argl Type Number The first argument to find the maximum of arg2 Type Number The second argument to find the maximum of Further arguments are optional arg3 Type Number The third argument to find the maximum of argN Type Number The N argument to find the maximum of Examples Max 3 4 Max 17 22 4 Max 82 amp VALUE 7 155 Min Function Returns the smallest of all given number Return Type Number arguments Min argl arg2 by ALG SG al y argN Arguments arg1
216. he type details are selected click Next gt to continue 72 9 3 1 3 Source The third screen in the upload wizard is Source and it is used to determine where the uploaded text file originates The file uploaded to the system must be encoded with the same character set charset that has been defined for the dataset being modified For more information about character sets see Appendix C E mail and International Character Sets Browser for the file on a local drive and then click Upload If a file has already been uploaded to the system a link to upload a different file appears Figure 66 Upload Wizard Source for Datasets Modify Recipient Dataset Members by Upload Type E Source lap Fields Hanna a fe Cancel Source Information about the dataset members source file Dataset Members File To be compatible to the dataset the members file has to be encoded with the ISO 8859 1 encoding TEA Upload a File Upload a file with dataset member rows p Select the text file containing the dataset members Click Upload to replace the current members file with the new file Click Cancel to keep the current members file File Name Browse Upload Cancel Figure 67 Upload Wizard Source for Lists Modify List Subscribers by Upload Type e Details Source Parse Deta Ma Cancel eid Source Information about the list subscribers source fi
217. header information that will be used for all recipients Address Enter a To Name optional address and optionally a name Header Definition EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demo soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y Wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demo lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Click Next gt to continue 16 7 Duplicate Elimination On the Duplicate Elimination screen define how duplicate recipients that may exist in the database will be handled Choose between the following options e Do not remove duplicates All recipients retrieved by the SQL query will be used for delivery even if some of them are duplicates e Remove duplicates with the same e mail addresses If the list of recipients retrieved by the SQL query contains entries with the same e mail address then only the first of th
218. host name port user name password etc and LISTSERV Maestro is then able to access that database to select the recipients Dataset LISTSERV Maestro s organization of E mail Merge Placing variables that are extracted from a database into an e mail message template This operation permits individual personalization of otherwise bulk e mail messages Filter A means of sorting through recipients in the warehouse to select them based on certain operators Floating point number Any number that has a decimal place Header A special row of data that defines and labels the columns in a database file In clause A part of the where clause of a SQL statement which allows the specification that a certain field or expression must have exactly one of several allowed values with the allowed values usually given in form of a comma separated list for the where condition to be true Lookup Table A set of values that is used for the values in a selection menu Lookup tables are shared across a recipient warehouse so multiple datasets can use them Maestro User Interface LUI A component of the LISTSERV Maestro program that allows regular users to create e mail jobs and tracking reports Multiple value A parameter type that allows for one or more values to fill in the select statement Parameter In LISTSERV Maestro a parameter acts like a placeholder for a part of a SQL statement that will be inserted into th
219. ield Details for Unmoderated Discussion Lists 2 0 0 0 ccc ceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeseeeseenaeees 39 7 2 4 List Type for Unmoderated Discussion Lists 00 0 0 eeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesneeeeenaeeesennaeens 40 7 2 5 List Options for Unmoderated Discussion Lists cccceeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeaaeaeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeenaeaeees 41 7 2 6 Posting Restrictions for Unmoderated Discussion Lists 0 ccc eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaeesennaeees 44 7 2 7 Topics for Unmoderated Discussion Lists cccccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeececaeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeneeaeees 46 7 2 8 Summary for Unmoderated Discussion LiSts ceccceeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeseaeeeeseaaeeeseeeaeeesseeeeseeeeeeeaeees 47 7 3 Creating LISTSERV Moderated Discussion Lists 0 00 0 eeeceeeseeeeeereeeenneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeenaeeeeeseaeeeseneeeeneeeenenaes 47 7 3 1 General Settings for Moderated Discussion LiStS 10 0 0 ee ee eeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeensaeeseenaeees 48 7 3 2 Profile Fields for Moderated Discussion Lists eee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeenaeeesennaeees 48 7 3 3 Profile Field Details for Moderated Discussion LiSts e ec ececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeseseeaeeesaeeeenaeeeeeenaeees 50 7 3 4 List Type for Moderated Discussion Lists 0 0 0 ccc eeeeseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeee
220. ier it will be for them to decide how to use the target groups to select the recipients they want for their e mail jobs If one or more parameters are of the type Restrict values s to floating point numbers the decimal separator that the database uses needs to be defined This will be either a dot period or a comma The selection of dot or comma here only defines how the floating point number will be formatted for replacement in the SQL statement In the recipients wizard the end user will always use a dot as the decimal separator when entering a floating point number 131 Figure 125 Input Layout LISTSERV Selects from a Database Target Group Definition Recipients General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Details Duplicate Elimination Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameter Details Supply additional information about the target group parameters Input Details Click up or down to move click New Heading to create a new heading click Delete Heading to remove an existing heading Demographics statesel State minage Age between e d Optional Text html HTML text Text New Heading text here Delete Heading Save Entry Change the order of the parameters using the Up and Down links Enter a heading for the parameter Add optional text to provide more information a
221. ill then be used to retrieve the values that will appear in the list from the database Use the option buttons to choose between the two methods For parameters where LISTSERV selects from a database all entries must be specified manually on this wizard screen 18 2 3 1 Manual specification Each value consists of two parts the visible text in the selection list that is the text that the end user actually sees in the list and the invisible value associated with that entry This invisible value associated with the entry selected by the end user will be used directly to replace the parameter placeholder If the parameter placeholder was not quoted then only integers can be used as the internal value of each entry If the parameter placeholder was quoted then any string can be entered for the internal values and all occurrences of the quote character in these will be escaped automatically before the replacement Do not escape quotes when entering the values To add a new entry click on the New link to the right of the list Enter the visible text into the left edit fields and the internal value into the right field Click on Save Entry The new entry will be added to the list To modify an existing entry simply select the entry in the list then edit its visible text and or internal value in the two edit fields above and click Save Entry to save the changes The entry will be updated accordingly To change the ordering of the entries sele
222. ils Hosted LISTSERV lists require a full name be defined for each subscriber comprised of a first name and last name separated by a space If a single mandatory data field exists for each subscriber containing a full name that meets this criterion move that field from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box If two fields are required to make up a full name each of these fields must be mandatory Move each of the fields from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box The second field is added after the first field leaving a space in between This makes it easy to combine a first name field with a last name field to produce a full name field for example Use the Move Up and Move Down links to change the order of the name fields 39 Figure 35 LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Field Details LISTSERY List Definition Topics Summary Profile Profile Field General Fields Details List Type List Options Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields Details Specify which of the LISTSERY list fields are used to assemble the Full Name of the list subscriber Select a mandatory single field that contains a valid full name consisting of at least a first name and a last name separated by a space This will be validated during input Alternatively select several fields two of which must be mandatory any remaining fields may be optional that the Full Name can be ass
223. in the condition Navigate the condition tree to display the conditions containing parameters Subscribers of LISTSERV at Work Parameter Details E AND i GH AND Parameter industry f findustry Label Industry Description Industry subscribers are affiliated with optional OWNER true Input Type Click Next gt to continue 13 5 Input Layout The Input Layout screen will only become active if there are parameters in a target group and they have been labeled on the previous screen If there are multiple parameters the order in which they appear to regular users may be reordered by using the Up and Down links To provide end users with more information on the parameters optional headings can be added to each parameter or a group of parameters Click the New Heading link to add a heading and optional introductory text Click Save Entry to save headings and introductory text Use the Delete Heading link to remove a saved heading 96 Figure 87 Target Group Wizard Input Layout for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameter Details Supply additional information about the target group parameters Input Details Click up or down to move click New Heading to Supply the heading and optionally an i
224. in the data file and does not add the subscriber to the dataset or the list The Update may be applied to List and dataset values All changes to both the dataset and the list will be accepted List values only Changes in the list will be accepted and any changes to the dataset will be ignored Overwrite Manual Changes If subscribers have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded values No keep values of manually changed subscribers Full Synchronize with List select the desired option button for each of the three sets of alternatives If the new subscriber is not yet part of the dataset Add as new dataset member Adds the subscriber to the dataset and the list Ignore subscriber row Skips the row in the data file and does not add the subscriber to the dataset or the list The Update may be applied to List and dataset values All changes to both the dataset and the list will be accepted List values only Changes in the list will be accepted and any changes to the dataset will be ignored Overwrite Manual Changes If subscribers have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded values No keep values of manually changed subscribers Remove from List No Details Available After t
225. ing Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on th Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Mes Editor Addresses Editor addresses can post without being subscribed sales XYZCompany com help XYZCompany com su Editor E Mail Addresses Enter the e mail addresses that can post without being subscribed one per row sales xYZCompany com help xXYZCompany com support xyYZCompany com OK Cancel Attachment Handling Sets the action the list will take when standard messages are receive with attachments There are three options 44 Accept all posts even if contain attachments Accept all posts but remove attachments the message itself will be delivered to the list but any attachments will be stripped off Reject all posts if they contain attachments any message submitted to the list with attachments will be automatically rejected Figure 42 LISTSERV List Wizard Handling Attachments Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Message Limits Handling of Attachments C Accept postings even if they contain attachments Accept postings but remove all attachments Reject postings if they contain attachments These restrictions affect the sender of messages to the LISTSERV list when they are submitted as
226. ink apply to all fields Figure 71 Upload Wizard Mapping Details for Boolean Fields Modify List Subscribers by Upload Type Type Details Source Parse Details Map Fields Mapping Details Cancel lt Back Fi Mapping Details You have mapped the file columns below to boolean fields in your list Boolean Values Parse Details for Multiple Select Values Specify for each boolean list field which of the values in the uploaded file represent the True False state Use the drop down menus to select 1 Enter a boolean value mapping how the value is interpreted True is every entry that is equal to the following value 7 y Sha ue and or False is every entry that is equal to the following value z n the edit Bee 2 Click on the name of a field to apply the mapping above to a single field where necessary or apply it to all fields Click on the field name to apply the HTML Boolean mapping value indicted PERMISSION True y True aMdernned False n False undefined In Step one to that single field n ji y n 78 Note In the interest of keeping this document shorter a screen shot of Mapping Details for a dataset is not included If there are multiple selection list fields in the dataset or list LISTSERV Maestro needs to know how multiple entries are separated what the separator character is see Section 9 3 1 4 Parse Details for more informat
227. ion of the node on the right side of the screen and the Actions on Selected Node menu link will be displayed on the right side Clicking on the link will open a menu that contains all currently possible actions that can be executed on the selected node Which actions these are available depends on the node type and the state it is in 180 For the root node only one action is available Remove Unnecessary Nodes This action will prune the tree and remove any unnecessary nodes from it in a way that the Boolean logic of the tree is not changed but that any superfluous nodes are removed For example any empty combination operator nodes are removed Note that if there currently are no unnecessary nodes executing this command will not have any effect See Combination Operator Nodes for details For combination type nodes the following actions may be available depending on the current state e Change Operator Type Opens a popup dialog box that allows for changing the operator type of the node There are four different types AND OR NOT AND and NOT OR See Combination Operator Nodes for details e Add Condition Adds a new normal condition type node to the selected combination node as a new child node See Normal Condition Nodes for details e Add Job Based Condition Adds a new job based condition type node to the selected combination node as a new child node See Job Based Condition Nodes for details e Add Combinati
228. ion on separator characters If the separator character is used in one or more of the list entries those entries need to be surrounded by a quote character that LISTSERV Maestro needs to be aware of as well see Section 9 3 1 4 Parse Details for more information on quote characters Figure 72 Upload Wizard Mapping Details for Multiple Selection Lists Modify List Subscribers by Upload Type Type Details Source Parse Details Map Fields Manning Details lt Back Fi Mapping Details You have mapped the file columns below to boolean fields in your list Boolean Values Parse Details for Multiple Select Values y Specify how the system will separate multi value entries in the file to yield correct values for multiple selection fields in the list Select the separator character How to Parse Multiple Select Field Values from the drop down menu If the value for a multiple select field contains more than one enof then the entries must be separated The following settings apply Multiple values are separated by the comma X If one of the entries happens to contain the separator character defined above then this entry must be surrounded with quotes No the file does not contain such entries No surrounding additional quote character is necessary Yes there are multi value entries that contain the separator Enter a quote All these entries are surrounded with Other z character if nec
229. is type of target group are derived from lists that have their recipients stored hosted in LISTSERV Maestro Once any type of list is created from a dataset a default target group is automatically generated by the system This default target group contains all of the list subscribers These target groups are located in a special category named lt Host Lists Default Target Groups gt They are named using the phrase Hosted Recipient Lis followed by the name of list Although the target group is automatically created it must be enabled in order for it to be used in the recipient definition of a mail job Click the Enable link in the upper right corner to allow the target group to be used Unlike other types of target groups the name of a hosted list default target group is not a clickable link that engages the target group definition wizard In order to manipulate an automatically generated target group click the Copy link in the upper right corner to make a copy The copy acts like a regular target group with a clickable name that will access the wizard Target groups based on hosted recipient lists can also be created from scratch by using the definition wizard as described below fip It can be faster to make a copy of an existing target group and edit it than create a new one from scratch 13 1 General General characteristics of the target group are comprised of a name a category and a description This information will be use
230. is used by the default template body font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif Bont Sizer Cones font weight normal font style normal font variant normal text transform none text decoration none background color FFFFFF layer background color FFFFFF color 000000 font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif EOIME SiLwSg Cyoies color 000000 wl f font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif tont Saez smelt ere font weight bold color eT eC UlOS Sy manoni mka Ost Ope Sixt Ojaics I A font family Verdana Arial Helvetica sans serif font size l10pt color 333399 imaweaime Oot Ot Set Qor text decoration underline Collor qos says 175 cel if font family Verdana fomic Siwes Spies color 000000 lela if font family Verdana font size 9pt font weight bold color 000000 background color impure font family Verdana FONES SZEREPE color 000000 select font family Verdana Font Size Chores color 000000 osuineylil 4 font size 8pt emphasis font weight bold oGueicone ii Sonkons eC COOS Sy emphasisBackground background color disabledEditField background color AMicitalleeClvictlhedr Sains Seid te Arial Helvetica sans serif F1F4FA Arial Helvetica sans serif Arial Helvetica sans serif F1F4FA E
231. isting LISTSERV List e Internal Description The internal description is seen by users working within the Maestro User Interface e Public Description The public description of the list appears on the subscription web form If subscribers are permitted to select the lists they want to join and can view and change their subscription settings having accurate descriptions will help them accomplish those tasks 37 Figure 33 LISTSERV List Wizard General LISTSERY List Definition cener Profile Profile Field Fields Details z Save amp Exit Bach Next gt This isa suffix that appears on all LISTSERV hosted lists created by this user group General Specify the name and the description of the LISTSERY list Suffixes are defined in the HUB Name Talkcbackto ED and prevent groups from using the same list name Internal Description customer discussion list unmoderated Public Description Optional Join our open discussion list for XYZ customers Share your tips and tricks with other users of XYZ software The most creative ideas will be published in our award winning monthly newsletter Click Next gt to continue 7 2 2 Profile Fields for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The second wizard screen is called Profile Fields Every new list begins with the fields in the dataset Other fields can be added to the list Any added list fields wil
232. kbox I a disabled checkbox a drop down selection list x a selection list option 2 option 3 etc bled single line input field 86 11 2 Creating a Custom Template Custom templates for the public pages of LISTSERV Maestro are based on a standard HTML page Create a new HTML document in an HTML editor or text editor The HTML page must be fully defined including the lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags The page itself may include any desired HTML code including a header footer and sidebar Style information is normally included in the head section of the HTML page The LISTSERV Maestro functionality of the public pages is represented in the HTML document by adding the placeholder CONTENT within the HTML page in the exact place where the individual subscriber content will be displayed This placeholder must be included in a template page in order to have the custom template accepted by the system The default template can be restored to a dataset at any time by clicking the Default Template link A custom template can be downloaded by clicking the Current Template link Figure 81 shows an example of a simple custom template layout The HTML code for a simple subscriber access pages template includes a page title My Subscriber Pages as well as a common header footer and a sidebar The layout of the page is defined with the help of a HTML table with three rows The first row co
233. ke sure that the merge values in the original recipients source LISTSERV list or LISTSERV DBMS already have the correct charset for the mail they are merged into For example in e mail sent with ISO 8859 1 West European all appearances of the byte 196 in the merge values will be interpreted as the umlaut A Even if the merge value is actually a Greek word where the byte 196 should have been interpreted as a A While mixing characters from different ISO 8859 charsets will simply display the wrong character to the recipient mixing ASCII and ISO 8859 or ISO 8859 and Unicode may even result in characters that cannot be displayed at all Most importantly if the mail text uses the Unicode encoding UTF 8 then it is necessary to make sure that the merge value texts in the recipients source are also UTF 8 encoded the byte sequence that stands for each merge value must be a valid UTF 8 encoded sequence representing a string of characters from the Unicode charset Then again it is usually not possible to define a charset for the mail and then in some way make sure that the merge values in the list or in the LISTSERV database match this charset since those merge values have usually been stored long before the mail was created Therefore the best way to proceed is to check which encoding was used when the data was stored in the list or LISTSERV database again you might need to ask your administrator for that information and then use the
234. l Inc The Open Group Motif OSF 1 UNIX and the X device are registered trademarks of The Open Group in the United State and other countries Digital Alpha AXP AXP Digital UNIX OpenVMS HP and HP UX are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Sun Solaris SunOS and PMDF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation All other trademarks both marked and not marked are the property of their respective owners This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http Awww apache org Some portions licensed from IBM are available at http oss software ibm com icu4j This product includes code licensed from RSA Security Inc Manuals for LISTSERV are available in PDF format from ftp lsoft com They are also available on the World Wide Web _http www lsoft com resources manuals asp L Soft invites comment on its manuals Please feel free to send your comments by e mail to MANUALS LSOFT COM About This Manual Every effort h
235. l not be shared among the other lists in the dataset To add a new field click the Add Field link For each new field enter the following information e Name The name of the field as it will be used internally by the system for mail merging and querying Field names can only use upper and lower case letters A Z and a z the numbers 0 9 and the underscore _ Spaces and other special characters are not allowed e Display Name The display name is the label that identifies the blank field on the web form The display name will be seen by anyone accessing the list s public subscription page on the Web All alphanumeric characters are permitted as well as spaces and most special characters e Data Type Choose the type of data to be entered in the field from the drop down menu Three different classifications of data are available selection lists are not available for hosted LISTSERV lists o Text Text fields can accept any type of text including dates in specific formats such as dd mm yyy or mm dd yyyy Number Number fields accept any whole integers Boolean Boolean fields are based on two states one being true the other false e Mandatory Decide whether the data is mandatory for subscribers to enter into the web form or optional Boolean fields cannot be optional due to the nature of the data type the selection equates to either true or false 38 After list fields are created the
236. lationships as well as column types and names This impacts the ability to write SQL statements and parameters within SQL statements to retrieve specific data e Working knowledge of SQL e Inthe case of LISTSERV Maestro accessing an external database To know the type of database and specific name of the database used This determines the database plugin that LISTSERV Maestro uses to communicate with the specific type of database for example IBM DB2 or MySQL For more information on database plugins see Section 5 2 Registering a Database Plugin in the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual Access to the database user account that is set up to work directly with LISTSERV Maestro including the username and password for the account For more information on preparing specific databases for use with LISTSERV Maestro see Section 4 2 Preparing the Database in the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual e Inthe case of LISTSERV accessing the database Database server name if not the default Name of the E mail column Name of the Name column this is optional Names of any additional columns in the database to be used for mail merging Being familiar with Section 5 1 Drop In Content and Section 11 2 Creating and Managing Drop In Content Elements in the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual can also be helpful to data administrators The concepts used in defining and creating drop in elements are very similar to defining and c
237. lds in the dataset and their password and subscription settings There are three levels of access to membership areas e Open to everyone The membership area is open to anyone who can access the URL from the Web Anyone can join login and manage profile and subscription settings Passwords are created by individuals joining the membership area Membership is not confirmed until new members respond to a confirmation e mail message sent by the system to the address used in the sign up form This level of access requires the lowest level of interaction from the data administrator and the highest level of interaction from members e Access for members only The data administrator must add members to the dataset Membership is automatically confirmed without the need for a confirmation e mail 80 Passwords are not assigned by the data administrator but generated by LISTSERV Maestro Members must request a password before they can login to manage their settings Once added and with a valid password these members have access to the membership area This level of access requires a moderate level of interaction from the data administrator and a moderate level of interaction from members e No public access The membership area is closed to everyone Members cannot join manage their profiles or leave This level of access requires the highest level of interaction from the data administrator and the lowest level of interaction from me
238. le List Subscribers File To be compatible to the list the subscribers file has to be encoded with the ISO 8859 1 encoding Upload a list subscribers file Upload a File Select the text file containing the list subscribers Click Upload to replace the current subscribers file with the new file Click Cancel to keep the current subscribers file File Name Browse Upload Cancel Click Next gt to continue 73 9 3 1 4 Parse Details The next screen in the wizard is called Parse Details When a text file is uploaded LISTSERV Maestro will try to determine how the columns of data are separated and how each column or field of data is labeled header In order to modify a dataset or list LISTSERV Maestro must correctly interpret which column contains the e mail address of the recipient Other fields may be included and will appear in the Preview table located on the lower half of the screen Figure 68 Upload Wizard Parse Details for Dataset Modify Recipient Dataset Members by Upload Details Cancel lt Back Next gt Fi Type Source Parse Details Map Fields Mapping Es Parse Details The uploaded source file needs to be parsed correctly before the member information can be extracted The preview below shows the result of the parsing performed using the settings specified on this page Column Separator and Quote Character To be compatible to the dataset the
239. le Profile Field Posting Fields Details List Type List Options Restrictions Jopics Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the settings of the LISTSERY list Click Finish to accept the changes Click Cancel to return to the recipient dataset details page without saving your changes Public List Access Open to everyone 7 Set the access level for the list Close the list temporarily by checking this box General Settings List Name NEWS FROM XYZ List Description Annoucement list for XYZ users and developers Profile Fields Name Display Name Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean n a shared field Leave unchecked for text mail USERTYPE Check the box if you are a developer Boolean n a Full Name Fields FNAME LNAME List Type Settings Type of List Announcement List Optional List Settings Archival mode for list No archive is maintained Mail Merging Mail merging is disabled Digest Mode Subscribers may not enable DIGEST mode Bounce Handling Bounced e mail addresses are removed from the list automati
240. led the choice for the source job becomes more limited Normally for job based conditions a possible source job is one that has been delivered to the same hosted 191 recipient list as the one the target group is based on When using the examine tracking events option the choice for the source job is narrowed to all the above jobs which also had personal tracking enabled at the time of delivery Because only the information collected with personal tracking is sufficient for the job based condition node to determine if the condition will be true or false With this option enabled a decision must be made for which events to actually take into consideration Will all events collected for the source job be used or only some To answer this question the following happens whenever you define a job based condition which shall also examine tracking events If the condition tree contains at least one such job based condition node additional input controls are displayed on the wizard page right below the condition tree These controls give you the option of defining a time period into which events of the source job must fall to actually be considered by the job based condition nodes in the tree The settings made here apply equally to all job based condition nodes in the tree that examine tracking events To define this event period you need to specify a From threshold where the period begins and a To threshold where the period
241. list The values from the first column of the result set will be used as the visible text of the selection list entries If there is a second column in the result set its values will be used as the internal values for the entries If there is no second column then the values from the first column will be used both for the visible text and the internal values Any further columns in the result set are ignored Make sure that the internal values match the quote context of the parameter If the parameter placeholder is not quoted then the internal values must be integer values that is the values from the second result set column or the ones from the first column if there is only one column If the values are not integers then the parameter placeholder must be quoted any necessary escaping of quotes in the values will happen automatically This option is very useful if it is not possible or desirable to enter all the selection values by hand There may be many different selections and some of the values may not yet be known For example think of a target group that has the city where a recipient lives as one of the parameters in order to do mailings limited to the residents of a certain city select from recipients where city name If this parameter is assigned the type Selection List all possible cities could be entered manually But this approach requires a lot of work and all the possible cities may not yet be known Another draw
242. load wizard is Map Fields If the header names for the columns of data do not match the names of the fields in the dataset or list they can be mapped to the correct fields All mandatory fields must be mapped to a unique column in the uploaded file Boolean fields in this context are considered mandatory Optional fields can be mapped but it is not necessary for a successful upload Any extra fields that may be contained in the file fields that are not listed in the dataset or list will be ignored by the system This way data to be used to modify datasets and lists does not need to match the format of the dataset or list exactly but can contain other fields and different header names If the uploaded file contains headers LISTSERV Maestro will attempt to map the fields to the column names Fields that are mapped successfully appear with a green checkmark icon next to them Fields that cannot be mapped automatically appear with a yellow arrows icon and fields that are mapped to more than one column have a red null icon To map a column from a file to a list or dataset field use the drop down menu under the header to locate the correct field and select it Optional fields can be mapped or they can be ignored by selecting lt ignore gt from the drop down menu 76 Figure 70 Upload Wizard Map Fields Modify Recipient Dataset Members by Upload Type Source Parse Details Map Fields cancel Deak Next gt Fi Map
243. ly to 56 specific topics For example a large list could have the general subject of XYZ Software Topics could be defined by the types of users of the software the type software purchased the tips and tricks for using the software For more information on Topics see the LISTSERV List Owner s Manual To define a new topic simply click the New Topic link and fill out the empty topic row that appears In the list topics are displayed either in the display mode or in the editable mode In the display mode each topic has an associated Edit link to set it into the editable mode In the editable mode each topic has the associated links Reset forget changes and reset the topic to the state it had when the editable mode was last entered for it Up move the topic up one step in the topics list Down move the topic down ones step in the topics list and Remove remove the topic When the topics settings of a list that already has subscribers changes all current subscribers topics selections need to be adjusted This will occur when the LISTSERV list wizard is completed The adjustment may take some time and a progress bar will be displayed as the system works fip Changing topics on for a list where subscribers are currently very active needs to be carefully considered so a major disruption does not occur A better strategy would be to temporarily close the hosted LISTSERV list for maintenance see Summary page adjust the topics a
244. mailing list Subscribers will see this name of the list on the web form when they subscribe Data administrators will see the list name in the dataset tree see Figure 58 and if they create a target group from a classic LISTSERV list see Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups for details Regular users will see the list name if they are allowed to define recipients for a job using by sending to an Existing LISTSERV List e Internal Description The internal description is seen by users working within the Maestro User Interface e Public Description The public description of the list appears on the subscription web form If subscribers are permitted to select the lists they want to join and can view and change their subscription settings having accurate descriptions will help them accomplish those tasks 26 Figure 21 Hosted LISTSERV List Wizard General LISTSERY List Definition ceerd Profile Profile Field Save amp Exit z ch Next gt su This is a ix that appears on all LISTSERV hosted lists created by this user group Specify the name and the description of the LISTSERY list Suffixes are defined in the HUB and prevent groups from using Name NEWS FROM E Dthe same list name Internal Description 4nnoucement list for XYZ users and developers General Public Description Optional Join our news list for XYZ customers Breaking news for users and developer
245. mailings to this hosted recipient list you may optionally define one or more of the list fields to constitute each subscriber s name as it is to be included in the To field of all e mails sent to the list If you do not define a subscriber name the To field will only contain the subscriber s address The fields in the list labelled Name Fields are appended to each other in the given order with a separating space between each to assemble the To field name of the mailing list subscriber Profile Fields Name Fields FNAME lt Mandatory gt LNAME lt Mandatory gt USERNAME lt Optional gt DOB lt Optional gt Use the arrows to Move Up move the profile fields into the nam fields column Move Down Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field D08 Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean n a shared field Leave unchecked for text mail PRODUCT Please select the XYZ titles you currently Multiple Select Optional own PRICE How much did you pay for the newest title Number Optional you purchased Please round the price to the nearest whole dollar Click Next gt to co
246. mal conditions and job based conditions The following sections describe different aspects of editing the condition tree explain the different nodes types available and give instructions on how to create one 179 Editing the Condition Tree This section describes general concepts about how the condition tree is edited The area in which is condition tree is edited is separated into a left and a right part The tree with all its nodes is shown in the left part while a description of the currently selected node together with an Actions on Selected Node link is displayed in the right part Below the two parts a textual representation of the condition is displayed at all times It mirrors the condition that is currently defined in a textual form using a pseudo syntax with commonly used elements With this representation it is possible to verify that the condition defined by the tree is indeed the intended condition The tree itself always consists of elements The top element is the root labeled with Subscribers of XYZ where XYZ is the name of the hosted recipient list the target group is based on The root always contains one single child node that is always a combination operator node This top level operator cannot be deleted but its type can be changed see Combination Operator Nodes for details Initially the top level operator is empty it does not contain any sub nodes This is equivalent to an empty condition that is
247. mation about that file will appear on the screen The link to upload a file will change to Upload a different file after one file has been successfully uploaded to the system Select the option Load recipients just before sending from a server file and then enter the path and name of the file the recipients will be taken from at the moment just before the message is sent The file must be on a valid path on the server running LISTSERV Maestro The file must also be included in a list of files that can be accessed by LISTSERV Maestro This list of permissible files is controlled by the system administrator and is necessary to maintain server security See the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual for more information on granting access to server files If the file is not available at the moment of sending the job will fail Click Next gt to continue or lt Back to return to the previous page 111 15 3 Source Details The Source Details screen parses the text file containing recipients for the target group When a text file is uploaded LISTSERV Maestro will try to determine how the columns of data are separated and how each column or field of data is labeled header In order to create a target group LISTSERV Maestro must correctly interpret which column contains the names of the recipients and which column contains the e mail addresses of the recipients Other fields may be included and will appear in the results table l
248. mbers Only numbers integer or floating point are accepted e Allow free text input Any kind of input including numbers or text is accepted The input from the end user will be used directly to replace the parameter placeholder If the parameter placeholder was quoted then all occurrences of the quote character in the user input will be automatically escaped before the replacement There are two versions of the Edit Field parameter type single value and multiple values In the single value version the input field will be a one line input field and the value entered by the end user will be the value used to replace the placeholder This type is only available if the matching placeholder is not inside of an in clause context In the multiple values version the input field will be rendered with multiple lines and the end user may enter several lines of text Each line will be interpreted as a separate value and the placeholder will be replaced with a comma separated list of all values of all lines Empty lines will be ignored This type is only available if the matching placeholder is inside of an in clause context Figure 130 Parameter Type Edit Field Single Value Data Administrator s View Parameters Enter the necessary details input type and further validation rules for each of the parameters in the SQL statement Click the parameter link in the SQL statement to select the parameter for editing SQL Statem
249. mbers Members wishing to be removed from a dataset will need to contact the data administrator and request removal Access levels can be changed at any time but care needs to be exercised if access levels are suddenly going from being open to being restricted 10 1 Joining a Membership Area Dataset When people want to subscribe to a list they can join the membership area that contains the list using the web form created by LISTSERV Maestro when the dataset was created By filling out this form they automatically become members of the dataset that contains the list They will be able to log into the membership area and subscribe to lists but they will not receive any list mail until they confirm their membership by replying to an automatically generated e mail message that was sent to the address they used when subscribing Members usually have 48 hours to confirm a membership They can also request another confirmation message be sent to them if they deleted the original one Joining a dataset using the membership form is a two step process The first step is to enter an e mail address and password The second step involves filling out the profile fields in the form Mandatory fields must be filled out in order to join successfully Optional fields can be left blank Figure 74 Joining a Membership Area Join XYZ Company Join our XYZ Company Customer Care Center to stay informed on all the new products showcasing this season Sign up t
250. messages are what LISTSERV calls a distribute job Mail merging is possible by using special substitution placeholders created by surrounding the names of the data fields column headers associated with the list with an ampersand amp at the beginning and a semi colon at the end for example amp INDUSTRY Bounce reporting is not available and neither is archiving or digests More options for tracking are available including personal unique and blind 99 Figure 91 Target Group Wizard Source Target Group Definition General Source Save amp Exit lt Back Wegt Source Select the LISTSERV list and specify further details LISTSERV List Select v Select e reer DEVELOP XYZ discussion list for XYZ developers mod L SOFT DEMO L Soft customer newsletter Send as SHLIST LISTSERV list No bounce NEWS FROM XYZ Annoucement list for XYZ users and devel Standard lisfyavanya ranna E E acking possible Click Next gt to continue If the job is sent as a standard list message to a list with no topics defined the wizard will skip to the Summary screen If the job is sent to a list with topics or as a special list message the wizard will continue with additional pages 14 3 Source Details The Source Details screen will appear differently depending on the type of message being sent Standard list messages for lists that have topics
251. mn that identifies the e mail address decide whether to use additional recipient data for mail merging and tracking and to edit the column headers if necessary The Recipients Details screen is split into three sections to accommodate these steps 15 4 1 Usage of Recipients Data LISTSERV Maestro needs to know if additional recipient data will be used for mail merging and tracking or whether this information is to be ignored and the job sent as bulk e mail If the Use additional recipient data for mail merging and tracking option button is selected columns from the text file or database can be used in the e mail message to create personalized messages These columns can then also be used to identify recipients for more detailed tracking reports For more information on using mail merging see the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual Section 5 6 Merge Fields and Conditional Blocks If the Ignore additional recipient data and send job as bulk e mail option button is selected any additional columns that were uploaded with the file or that appear in the database will be ignored by the system It will not be possible to use mail merging Tracking for the message will be limited to blind tracking meaning that the tracking data available from the job will not be associated with identifiable individuals or other demographic information It is possible to enter an address and optional name for the To field in the message header s
252. mputer s operating system For sending LISTSERV Maestro needs to decide on a charset that it can use to encode the message Specify the charset to use while defining the content there is a special item for this on the content definition page or tell LISTSERV Maestro that it should attempt to automatically determine which charset is the optimal one for the text contained in the message In the latter case LISTSERV Maestro scans the written text to determine the optimal charset If the message uses characters that can be displayed with the ASCII charset the case with most English language texts LISTSERV Maestro will choose the ASCII charset If the message contains characters outside of the ASCII range but that can still be displayed with one of the 194 supported ISO 8859 charsets then LISTSERV Maestro will choose the corresponding ISO 8859 charset And optionally only if LISTSERV Maestro is set to allow Unicode the message has characters that cannot be displayed with one of the ISO 8859 charsets for example Asian characters or there are mixed characters from several ISO 8859 charsets then LISTSERV Maestro will choose Unicode as the charset Once a charset is chosen LISTSERV Maestro encodes each character as a bit sequence according to that charset The e mail that is sent is then augmented by the information of which charset was used to encode it This information is then used by the receiving mail client to decode the bi
253. n personalizing the e mail one step further When using recipients uploaded as text files or selected from the database by the Maestro User Interface then the use of the name in the To header field does not fall under the constraints regarding charsets and text merging The name in the To header field will always be encoded with the charset that is optimal for exactly this name Users may safely write an e mail message in English and send it to international recipients Each recipient will see his or her name with the correct characters in the To header so that a German recipient will correctly see umlauts a Russian will see Cyrillic and a Greek will see Greek letters under the condition of course that the original recipient list was in Unicode format and contained the names of the recipients with their respective international characters Just remember that with such a mixed language list of recipients merge values you should not also merge the name into the text body itself unless the text is encoded as Unicode UTF 8 as well due to of the problems described earlier When using recipients that are defined by sending to an existing LISTSERV list or by letting LISTSERV select from a database then again the bytes from the name merge value will be merged into the To header correctly by LISTSERV without the Maestro User Interface having a chance to encode them And because it is very improbable that the names the by
254. n LISTSERV Maestro will determine ASCII as the correct encoding for the message and the recipient data If then the names of the international recipients are encoded as ASCII all non ASCII international characters will be replaced with question marks To avoid this problem use the same charset for the message body as was used for the merge data If the recipients information was uploaded as a text file 195 then simply use the same charset for sending as was used during the initial upload And if the recipients information was selected from a database use the same charset as was used by the database ask the database administrator for this information if it is unclear In summary recipients that are uploaded as a text file or are selected from a database by the Maestro User Interface merge value characters that have no representation in the charset that was chosen for the mail text will be displayed as To avoid this problem make sure the message body is encoded with the same charset as the recipient list If recipients are defined by sending to an existing LISTSERV list or by letting LISTSERV select from a database then the Maestro User Interface will not see the actual recipients or their merge values and cannot do any special charset encoding on them Instead LISTSERV will simply merge the bytes from the recipients source from the LISTSERV list or from the database LISTSERV connects to into the mail text Consequently ma
255. n place Unmoderated discussion groups where membership is determined by the data administrator can also be large and high volume or they can be medium sized or very small Subscribers communicate amongst themselves on a specific topic Incidents of spamming and flaming are generally low because only subscribers can post to the list and their subscription request has been reviewed Unmoderated discussion lists can provide a dynamic platform for disseminating information sharing options collaborative learning and much more Unmoderated discussion lists can generate a large amount of mail and take up server resources if archives are kept Some thought needs to be given to the number and type of subscribers permitted to join this type of LISTSERV list and some monitoring needs to take place in order to keep the level and topics of discussion pertinent to list 7 2 1 General Settings for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The first screen General defines the general information pertaining to the list e Name This is the name of the mailing list Subscribers will see this name of the list on the web form when they subscribe Data administrators will see the list name in the dataset tree see Figure 58 and if they create a target group from a classic LISTSERV list see Section 14 Classic LISTSERV List Target Groups for details Regular users will see the list name if they are allowed to define recipients for a job using by sending to an Ex
256. n the English speaking world probably the most widely used charset is ASCII sometimes also called US ASCII which is a charset that maps 7 bit sequences to the 26 characters from the Latin alphabet Because 7 bits have enough room for 128 characters 0 127 there are more than the 26 Latin characters in the ASCII charset First each character appears twice as upper case and lower case then there are the ten digits 0 9 various punctuation marks like comma dot semi colon colon dash slash backslash exclamation question mark and so forth There are also other characters that can act as control characters that is characters that have special meaning to certain protocols such as and amp Used almost as frequently at least in the western world are the charsets from the ISO 8859 family These charsets map 8 bit sequences to letters digits and characters from various European languages Hebrew and Arabic Since the ISO 8859 charsets use 8 bits they have twice the range as ASCII enough room for 256 characters 0 255 For convenience all ISO 8859 charsets contain the full range of ASCII in their lower 128 characters the bytes 0 127 from any ISO 8859 charset map directly to the corresponding ASCII character making ISO 8859 a superset of ASCII The differences of each ISO charset are in the upper 128 characters the bytes 128 255 For example ISO 8859 1 mapping an alphabet suitable for West European lang
257. nd then re open the list When adding new topics to a list that already has subscribers an additional checkbox option Existing subscribers will have the new topics selected automatically will appear Check this option to automatically add all the existing subscribers to the new topics When left unchecked existing subscribers will not be subscribed to the new topics Subscribers will be able to change their settings to add or drop the new topics when they wish This checkbox option applies to all topics that are added on this page during the same list wizard session To add several topics some of which the current subscribers are automatically subscribed to and some not the list wizard has to be engaged twice once with the box checked for those topics to be added to all subscribers and once with the box unchecked for those topics that will not be added to all subscribers Figure 56 LISTSERV List Wizard Topics LISTSERY List Topics Specify the topics that will be available for the LISTSERY List Topic Name DEVELOPERS lt new gt CEt Click the edit link to change the settings INSTRUCTORS lt new gt Edit of the topic PARENTS lt new gt Edit CHILDREN lt new gt Edit Use these links to change the currently defined topic LANGUAGE lt new gt Edit MUSIC lt new gt Edit MATH lt new gt Edit Add a new topic with this link Click Next gt to continue 57 7 3 8 Summary for Modera
258. ne of the operands is of type text then the is interpreted as the concatenation operator and the result will be of type text If the other operand is of the type number it is automatically converted to text first see Automatic Type Conversion Operator Precedence and Parenthesis Formulas are processed by LISTSERV Maestro following the usual mathematical conventions The multiplication division type operators and have higher precedence than the addition subtraction type operators and Operators with higher precedence are processed first if several operators with the same precedence level are encountered They are processed from left to right Parenthesis can be set freely to influence precedence Inner parenthesis will be processed before outer parenthesis Examples 15 3 4 Result 27 8 7 3 Result 32 153 WEVA D2 2 S05 Result 2 17 22 2 5 Result 17 17 22 2 5 Result 187 Automatic Type Conversion Operators and functions usually require their operands and arguments to be of a certain type However under one circumstance it is possible to supply an expression of a different type as an operand or argument which will then automatically be converted to the required type Whenever an operand or argument of the type text is required an expression of the type text or of the type number c
259. nel icon located in the upper left of the recipient data table denotes a row of blank edit boxes at the top of each column Use the boxes to enter filtering conditions to narrow the search for specific members or subscribers After adding the filtering conditions in the text boxes click the 64 funnel icon to filter the members A new set of members will be displayed on the screen This set can be filtered again by adding additional conditions in the text boxes and clicking the funnel again After filtering the members can be downloaded by clicking the download icon located in the blue header row of the table The file that is downloaded is in zipped format Figure 65 Edit List Subscriber Manage Members of Recipient Dataset Click the This page displays the members of the selected dataset E filteri diti in the b disk to E E S Deletes all selected nter filtering conditions in the boxes download Co members members EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML i eg O DOS CO e CO ce Click the E me funnel to Hijam maestro demo lsoft con Mirjam Mcintosh apple pie 1 1969 F Odette maestro demo lsoft com Odette Owi leap frog al 1976 F apply the Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer a 1982 T condition temp3 cherry ease soft com Kerry Sanders quarterback 1 1985 E Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 T vette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 E
260. neral Settings screen are allowed to post with out being subscribed 54 Figure 53 LISTSERV List Wizard Distribution Handling LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field Posting General Fields Details List Type List Options RESticOne Topics Summary fet Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Posting Restrictions Moderator E Mail Addresses Enter the moderator e mail addresses one per row Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Message Limits jjones dev xyYZCompany com ddukane dev xYZCompany com Moderator Addresses i pay Postings from subscribers will be sent to the moderator addresses for mode jjones dev XYZCompany com ddukane dev XYZCompany com Editor Addresses Editor addresses can post without going through moderation support XYZCompany com Editor E Mail Addresses Enter the e mail addresses that can post without going through moderation one per row OK Cancel support xYZCompany com Attachment Handling Sets the action the list will take when standard messages are receive with attachments There are three options Accept all posts even if contain attachments Accept all posts but remove attachments the message itself will be delivered to the list but any attachments will be stripped off Reject all posts if
261. nformation is only available until you leave this page Invalid rows Subscribers that already exist on the list 1 x Click OK to accept all modifications and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen Section 10 Members Join a Dataset Themselves Although data administrators can add members to a dataset and subscribers to a list allowing people to sign themselves up to receive the e mail they want is the best way to grow an internal mailing list One of the best practices an organization can undertake to ensure their messages are received opened and reacted to by those who wish to participate is building a strong authentic subscriber base Allowing people to join a dataset subscribe to the lists they want and manage their own settings can save the data administrator time and create goodwill between an organization and its membership LISTSERV Maestro provides several different levels of access for dataset members and list subscribers so that the data administrator can control how members and subscribers are added and removed from the system Access to datasets and lists are set on the Summary screen of each definition wizard dataset and list For datasets the access levels pertain to the availability of the membership area on the Web The membership area contains a form to join for non members login for current members and once logged in a membership profile settings page made up of the values of the fie
262. not contain a header it is possible to define a header within LISTSERV Maestro Header labels are limited to upper and lower case letters the numbers 0 9 and the underscore Any illegal characters in the headers will have to be changed before proceeding Before continuing to the next screen specify the E mail Column and the Name Column using the drop down menus At the top of the screen under Usage of Recipients Data use the option buttons to select one alternative Figure 118 Target Group Wizard Recipients Details Use Additional Recipients Data Target Group Definition Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Recipients Details 124 Figure 119 Target Group Wizard Recipient Details Send Job as Bulk Mail Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Save amp Exit lt Back Next Recipients Details Select the columns in the recipient data containing the e mail address and name Usage of Recipients Data C Use additional recipient data for mail merging and tracking Ignore additional recipient data and send job as bulk e mail No mail merging possible only blind tracking possible Recipient Identification Columns Select the column that identifies the recipients e mail address and enter the name and address that will appear in the To header E mail Column EMAIL x Select the column for e mail addresses To
263. ntains the common header in a single column The second row contains two columns The left column is the sidebar with a width of 100 pixels The right column contains the actual page content so this is the location of the CONTENT placeholder Finally the third row contains the common footer in a single column Figure 81 Sample Custom Template lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt My Subscriber Pages lt title gt See Appendix D for style lt style gt Style information would go here lt style gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table border 0 gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 gt This is my common head lt C gt Sie ie gt lt td width 100 gt Sidebar lt td gt lt td gt CONTENT lt td gt Sf TRS SEES lt td colspan 2 gt This is my common footer for all subscriber pages lt td gt Kpiewe gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt information weitere all The LISTSERV Maestro subscriber content placeholder must be included in the template Using CSS styles Cascading Style Sheet to customize the look of page content can ensure that whatever styles are being used in other web pages can be used within LISTSERV Maestro too The HTML code that LISTSERV Maestro uses to generate the CONTENT portion of the page employs some commonly used HTML tags as well as some custom style classes the look of which can be defined with by creating a custom style sheet or matching an exi
264. nthly customer newsletter Profile Fields Name Display Name Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted Boolean n a shared field mail Leave unchecked for text mail PRODUCT Please select the XYZ titles you currently Multiple Optional own Select XYZ Products PRICE How much did you pay for the newest title Number Optional you purchased Please round the price to the nearest whole dollar Subscriber Name Fields FNAME LNAME Use the lt Back button to return to the previous screen Click Finish to save the list and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen After a hosted recipient list has been added to the dataset it will appear in the dataset tree in the left frame represented by this icon and accompanied by the list name 24 Section 7 Creating Hosted LISTSERV Lists Hosted LISTSERV lists contain data from the dataset They can also have their own data fields that are not shared among lists in the dataset but belong exclusively to the list Lists that do have their own fields will also have their own Web subscription forms generated when the list is created
265. ntinue 6 1 4 Summary The final screen in the wizard is the Summary page All the settings for the list are displayed here Set the access level for the list by selecting one of the options in the drop down menu under the heading Public List Access Lists that are Open to everyone can be subscribed to from the dataset web form or the list web form Anyone with the URL to either form can access 23 the list subscription page Lists that have Access for subscribers only are visible to subscribers who have been added to the list by the data Administrator The list will not be displayed on the dataset web form when accessed by a non member Lists with No public access will not appear to non subscribers or subscribers from the dataset web form This setting can be used when a list is under construction to prevent anyone from signing up prematurely Figure 19 Hosted Recipient List Wizard Summary Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary This page summarizes the settings of the recipient list Click Finish to accept the changes click Cancel to return to the recipient dataset details page without saving your changes Public List Access open to everyone 7 Access for subscribers only No public access General Settings List Name xYZ Monthly Newsletter List Description mo
266. ntroduction to Recipient Target Groups Figure 2 Recipient Warehouse Recipient Warehouse Administer the recipient warehouse Administer subscribers and mailing lists maintained by LISTSERV Maestro Recipient Datasets Administer predefined recipient selections for use with e mail jobs in LISTSERV Maestro Recipient Target Groups 4 1 Recipient Datasets A recipient dataset is a collection of data organized into fields and pertaining to recipients The fields making up a dataset can have different types of properties that determine the kind of data within them such as text numbers selection menus dates and so on The data administrator designs the datasets within a recipient warehouse creating each field and the type of data it holds The recipient dataset also contains mailing lists created by the data administrator that use the recipient data for job definition The data is shared across all mailing lists that are created within the dataset Individual lists within the dataset are allowed to have additional fields of data that just pertain to those lists As the dataset is being created a web form is also being created that reflects the exact design of the dataset including the order of the fields the descriptions of each field and the types of data to be collected Each organization has to decide what kinds of data to collect including the acceptable format of that data and how the data is entered into the web
267. ntroductory text Click create a new heading click Delete Heading to Save Entry to accept the changes remove an existing heading Heading Text Subscribers Reportec Subscribers Reported Industry industry Industry Introductory Text Select the industry that subscribers have reported being afiliated with as Down criteria for segmenting a mail job New Heading zi Delete Heading Save Entry Click Next gt to continue 13 6 Input Preview The Input Preview screen only becomes active if there are parameters in a target group and the Input Layout screen has been successfully completed A preview of the parameter input page as regular users will see it is generated here Verify that the layout is acceptable If not use the lt Back button to return to previous pages in the wizard to make changes Figure 88 Target Group Wizard Input Preview for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters Input Layout Input Preview Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameter Input Page Preview This page shows a preview of the parameter input page as it will be displayed during a recipient definition based on this target group Please verify that everything looks as it is supposed to or go back to the previous pages to change the settings Subscribers Reported Industry Select the industry that subscribers have reported being
268. o beta test our new software join our discussion lists to talk about your favorite XYZ product To join follow the steps outlined below Joining will allow you to subscribe to any of the mailing lists If you already are a member please go to the login page Step 1 E mail Address and Password E mail Address luckyme7S5 yahoo com Password Repeat Password Continue with Step 2 Cancel Step 2 Profile First name D Last name Screen name Sa Number of XYZ products currently owned aa Date of birth E R Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Leave unchecked for text mail pm Once the form is filled out and sent a perspective member will be sent to the membership area where profile data can be changed and lists can be subscribed to but no mail will be sent to the address until the member has confirmed their membership 81 Figure 75 Membership Area for an Unconfirmed Member XYZ Company Logout Join our XYZ Company Customer Care Center to stay informed on all the new products showcasing this season Sign up to beta test our new software join our discussion lists to talk about your favorite XYZ product Welcome You can subscribe to any of the mailing lists under My Lists and manage your membership settings under My Profile Confirmation Required Your membership is still unconfirmed A confirmation e mail was sent to ugodocgal hotmail com Follow the instructions
269. o denote the parameter The tags can be changed from their default values of opening and closing curly brackets by entering other characters in the corresponding boxes The quote character and an escaped quote character used by the database to enclose string literals also needs to be entered in the corresponding boxes See Section 18 Defining Parameters for more information on how to parameterize the SQL statement and for details about the meaning of the opening and closing tag input fields Figure 123 Target Group Wizard Source Target Group Definition General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview ren a Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Source Enter the name of the database server attached to LISTSERV and an SQL statement Database Server optional leave empty to use the default database SQL Statement SELECT EMAIL ADDRESS AS EMAIL F_NAME AS FIRSTNAME F_NAME L_NAME AS FULLNAME INTEREST1 AS MODELNO M Parameter placeholders in the SQL statement are enclosed by the following tags Opening Tag BE Closing Tag hy Quote character used by the database to enclose string literals Quote Escaped Quote fe required when using parameters Click Next gt to continue 17 3 Parameters If parameters are part of the SQL statement on the Source screen they will need to be further defined on this screen All parameters appear as clickabl
270. ocated on the lower half of the screen Figure 107 Parse Recipients for a Target Group Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parse Recipients Character Encoding Column Separator and Quote Character The system will interpret the recipients file with standard encoding and will try to determine the separator and quote character automatically Specify details manually Header Row Yes the first row in the file contains the headers C No the file does not have a header row Preview FNAME LNAME USERNAME SOFTWARE DOB HTML USERTYPE PERMISSION BETATEST zoe maestro demo soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy 3 1961 n n y n yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool 1 1987 y n y n xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way 2 1970 y y n y wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid 4 1980 y n y y Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters 2 1983 n n n n Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl 1 1991 y n n n Toby maestro demo lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky 3 1992 y n y n Seth maestro demo lsoft com Seth Simpson Homer 1 1982 y y y y Ron maestro demo lsoft com Ron Remmington remmer 3 1979 y y n n Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways 4 1974 n n n n Refresh Preview Click the Next gt button to continue if the parsing is accurate with ea
271. ocument shorter a screen shot of Map Fields for a list is not included Once all the mandatory fields are correctly mapped it will be possible to proceed by clicking the Next gt button 9 3 1 6 Mapping Details The Mapping Details screen is only available when there are Boolean fields and or multiple selection fields in the dataset or list that need to be interpreted by LISTSERV Maestro If there are both Boolean fields and multiple selection fields the Mapping Details screen will appear with two tabs one representing each type of field When each portion of the tabbed page is mapped a green checkmark will appear on that tab When Boolean fields are present in a dataset or list LISTSERV Maestro needs to know what value equates to true and what value equates to false for each field These values do not have to be the same for all fields in the dataset or list Each Boolean field can have its own true and false values For example one field might have the digit 1 represent true and the digit O represent false and another field might have the letter Y represent true and the letter N represent false Once the true and false values have been defined they can be used to tell the system how to use the values to register a true or false for the file A true value can be registered by selecting one of the options e True is every value that is equal to the value entered in the edit box e True is eve
272. of type Field and the corresponding field is of type Text The right operand is a constant text string To define an operand of this type select the text from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes an edit field where you now enter the text string to use Boolean Only available if the left operand is of type Field and the corresponding field is of type Boolean The right operand is a constant Boolean value of true or false To define an operand of this type select the Boolean value from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes a drop down list as well so the Boolean value to use can be selected Formula Only available if the left operand is of type Number Text Formula or Field where then in turn the corresponding field must be of type Number or Text The right operand is a formula When the condition is evaluated the formula is evaluated first and its result is used as the right operand of the condition To define an operand of this type select the value of the formula from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes a multi line edit field where the formula can be entered See below for details about formulas Parameter Only available if the left operand is of type Field any kind of field The right operand is a parameter whose content is not already defined during the condition definition but which will be sup
273. om the documentation of that Java class Important Note For date time formatting and parsing by default the U S locale and the current time zone of the server where the Maestro User Interface LUI component is running is used This means that if locale specific values names of months weekdays era designators and the like are required they will be given as the U S locale values by default Similarly if a time is given it will be formatted or interpreted as relative to the time zone of the server although for parsing a specific time zone can be supplied If the default U S locale is not desired specify a locale in the ToDate or ToMil1lis function Date and Time Patterns Date and time formats are specified by pattern strings Within pattern strings unquoted letters from A to z and from a to z are interpreted as pattern letters representing the components of a date or time string see below for details Text can be quoted using single quotes lt gt to avoid interpretation In a quoted text the double single quote lt gt represents a single quote All other characters are not interpreted they are simply copied into the output string during formatting or matched against the input string during parsing The following pattern letters are defined all other characters from A to z and from a to z are reserved The letters are case sensitive The same letter has dif
274. on Operator Adds a new combination operator node to the selected combination node as a new child node See Combination Operator Nodes for details e Cut Marks the selected combination operator node for Cut amp Paste When cut the node is displayed with a grayed name to visualize that it has been designated for Cut amp Paste The node is not actually cut removed from its current location until the Paste command is selected at a different location The grayed state is only a visual reminder that the node has been marked for Cut Note The Cut command is not available for the top level combination node since this node cannot be deleted e Copy Marks the selected combination operator node for Copy amp Paste The node is not actually copied until the Paste command is selected at a different location e Paste Completes an ongoing Copy amp Paste or Cut amp Paste operation that was previously started with either the Cut or the Copy command of a different node Through the initial command a node had been marked for cut or copy and executing the paste command completes the operation by actually moving the node from its old location to the currently selected combination node for Cut or by creating a copy of the node in the currently selected combination node for Copy The Paste command itself is therefore only available if actually a node has been marked for Cut amp Paste or Copy amp Paste e Cl
275. operand is of type Field and the corresponding field is of type Multiple Select The right operand is a fixedly selected entry set from the lookup table that the left operand field is associated with To define an operand of this type select the set of entries selected below from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes a multiple selection list box filled out with all values from the lookup table that is associated with the left operand field Select one or several of the values to use from the drop down list hold down CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple entries or to deselect already selected entries Formulas in Conditions Formulas can be used in conditions to calculate the left and or right operand value at run time the moment the condition is actually applied to a given subscriber to determine if the subscriber will become one of the recipients of a job or not Such a formula is typed directly into the multi line edit field provided by the condition definition dialog box Line breaks in the formula code have no effect on the result of the formula but can be freely used to enhance readability The syntax follows general mathematical formula rules using operators such as and parenthesis nesting and so on There are also a number of predefined functions that can be used in formulas Examples of formulas 15 4 27 Max 17 4 24 8 19 22 amp NAME lsoft com ToNum amp A
276. or all target groups except those listed under lt Hosted Lists Default Target Groups gt In order to edit target groups for hosted lists they first must be copied see below Copy Use the Copy link to create a new target group as a copy of the selected one The name of a copied target group will be listed alphabetically as Copy of original name This name can be changed when editing the target group When a hosted list default target group is copied the copy is placed in the lt No Category gt category by default The category may be changed by engaging the target group wizard Delete Click the Delete link to delete the selected target group Target Group Based On Displays the type of the data the target group is based on Currently five types are supported Hosted Recipient List Classic LISTSERV List Uploaded Text File Database accessed by LISTSERV Maestro 89 Database accessed by LISTSERV see Section Selecting the Type of Target Group for more details Description The description of the target group It is important to create an accurate description of the type of data being retrieved so that regular users will be able to select an appropriate target group for their e mail jobs Status The current status of the target group Incomplete This target group has not yet been completed It may be partially defined and remain in this state while the target group administrato
277. orking within the Maestro User Interface e Public Description The public description of the list appears on the subscription web form If subscribers are permitted to select the lists they want to join and can view and change their subscription settings having accurate descriptions will help them accomplish those tasks Figure 45 LISTSERV List Wizard General LISTSERY List Definition ___ Profile Profile Field General Fields Details Save amp Exit ach Next gt Bac This ts a suffix that appears on all LISTSERV hosted lists created by this user group Specify the name and the description of the LISTSERV list Suffixes are defined in the HUB nme velop Gowran prevent groups from using i the same list name Internal Description discussion list for XYZ developers moderated by software engineering General Public Description This moderated discussion list is for developers working with XYZ Software Optional Postings are subject to approval from XYZ Company Our list archives are open to subscribers searching for ideas and solutions Click Next gt to continue 7 3 2 Profile Fields for Moderated Discussion Lists The second wizard screen is called Profile Fields Every new list begins with the fields in the dataset Other fields can be added to the list Any added list fields will not be shared among the other lists in the dataset To add a new field click
278. orm every time it is used with the target group For example select from recipients Or more complex select email name city from recipients where age gt 30 and age lt 39 A fixed statement will always yield the same results regardless of the circumstances of how the target group is used as long as the actual database content does not change A fixed statement is useful in certain circumstances The first example given here would simply select all entries from a certain table If that is the required behavior then a fixed statement is the correct statement type to use The second example selects only those recipients that are in their thirties age gt 30 and lt 39 This is very limiting Targeting a different age group would necessitate creating a new target group with a different SQL statement In fact with fixed statements every different age group would require its own target group and SQL statement Setting up these fixed statements would involve a lot of work for the data administrator as well as take away flexibility for the end users Using a parameterized statement can save time and effort as well as giving end users more flexibility in selecting recipients A parameterized statement contains placeholders in the SQL code that are replaced by the end user who uses the target group for the actual recipient definition These placeholders are not real SQL code but a sort of meta code By using placeholders parts
279. ormation on host restrictions installing LISTSERV Maestro and starting and stopping the LISTSERV Maestro service see the LISTSERV Maestro Installation Manual For more information on preparing databases to work with LISTSERV Maestro see the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual 1 1 System Requirements Depending on the operating system of the client used for the access the following browsers are supported when accessing the Maestro User Interface or Administration Hub e Client with Windows Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Netscape 7 0 or later and Mozilla 1 0 0 or later e Client with Linux Netscape 7 0 or later and Mozilla 1 0 0 or later To access the Maestro User Interface or the Administration Hub we strongly recommend that only Windows or Linux be used with the browsers and browser versions listed Other operating systems browsers or browser versions are not supported The client does not necessarily have to have the same operating system as the LISTSERV Maestro server A Linux client can be used to access LISTSERV Maestro on a Windows server and vice versa It is important to note that recipients of e mail being tracked by LISTSERV Maestro may use whatever browser they wish to access the URLs contained in the message Tracking will occur no matter which browser is used by e mail recipients 1 2 New Features LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 introduces powerful new abilities to collect manage save and reuse da
280. ot be DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field changed from here HTML mai levo uneneked or eimai oes OA shared field Gsertype Chek the bon f you are a developer Boolean opten A Reset Baibars Use this link to add a field to the list Click Next gt to continue 7 1 3 Profile Field Details for LISTSERV Announcement List The next screen in the wizard is Profile Field Details Hosted LISTSERV lists require a full name be defined for each subscriber comprised of a first name and last name separated by a space If a single mandatory data field exists for each subscriber containing a full name that meets this criterion move that field from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box If two fields are required to make up a full name each of these fields must be mandatory Move each of the fields from the Profile Fields box to the Name Fields box The second field is added after the first field leaving a space in between This makes it easy to combine a first name field with a last name field to produce a full name field for example Use the Move Up and Move Down links to change the order of the name fields 28 Figure 23 LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Fields Details LISTSERV List Definition Profile Profile Field General List Type List Options TE Fields Details Save amp Exit Profile Fields Details Specify which of the LISTSERY list fields are
281. p in the recipients wizard The end user will then have the choice to set the To threshold to the same delivery time of the follow up job as explained above to catch even the latest events or to set it to a specific date and time to end event examination at this specific time 192 Appendix F E mail and International Character Sets Computers store all information in the form of bits or their 8 bit conglomerations bytes Bits are also the entities that are transferred from the sender s computer to the recipients computer whenever an e mail message is sent E mail programs take the message and convert it to bits The message is sent and the receiving e mail client program translates these bits back into a readable message for the recipient This process takes place seamlessly for the sender and the recipient The sender first creates a text message and the recipient receives a text message all the converting remains behind the scenes In order for characters from an alphabet to be converted into bits for transmission and then converted back into the message the bits have to be arranged into sequences representing each character in the alphabet Matching the bit sequences to alphabetical characters is called mapping Mapping bit sequences to alphabets has resulted in several different so called character sets short charsets that have been defined and standardized by the international community I
282. parse the file again Header Row Yes the first row in the file contains the headers C No the file does not have a header row Preview email fname Iname username software dob html usertype permission betatest zoe maestro demo soft com Zoe Zimmerman zimmy lt 3 yvette maestro demo lsoft com Yvette Yosel kitty kool Xavier maestro demo lsoft com Xavier Xero no way Wilfred maestro demo lsoft com Wilfred Wonderly wiz kid Vanna maestro demo lsoft com Vanna VonSchedule letters Ursula maestro demo lsoft com Ursula Underhill hobbit girl Toby maestro demo lsoft com Toby Tuttle slow poky Seth maestro demo soft com Seth Simpson Homer Ron maestro demo soft com Ron Remmington remmer WF WO YF HY APH KF WwW 3 Siea Ree Sa lt Gee gt ton lt Sa 3 feo lt fo lt 3 31 lt fo 5 Fag eS Quod maestro demo lsoft com Quod Quartermaster four ways Click this button to refresh the preview table to see if the file is parsed correctly Note In the interest of keeping this document shorter a screen shot of Parse Details for a list is not included LISTSERV Maestro has four selections for choosing separator characters e Tab t e Comma e Semicolon e Other if this is chosen type the character into the adjacent box 75 Columns can be defined as not enclosed by a quote character or select the quote character from three choices e Double Quotes e Apostrophe
283. pear with the correct names of the U S locale Similarly times given in the date time text string will be interpreted as relative to the server s time zone To specify a different locale use the optional parameter localename to choose a predefined locale or with the optional parameters langcode and count rycode to specify your own locale See Time and Date Patterns for details To specify the time as relative to a different time zone include a time zone value in the date time text Return Type Number 160 Arguments datetext Type Text The date time text string to parse Must contain the desired date time in a textual format which can be parsed by applying the given format pattern formatpattern Type Text specifies the format pattern to use to parse the datetext See Date and Time Patterns for details The following arguments are optional Either you supply no further argument at all Or you supply only the following argument localename Type Text A name of a predefined locale See section 0 for a list of available locale names If specified any locale specific text in dat etext will be expected according to this locale Or you supply both the following two arguments langcode Type Text A lowercase two letter ISO 639 language code specifying the language for the locale See for example http ftp ics uci edu pub ietf http
284. plied later by the end user when the target group the condition belongs to is used in the recipient wizard See below for details about parameters Check for empty Only available if the left operand is of type Field and the corresponding field is an optional field The right operand is the empty value i e the condition compares the given left operand field against the empty value using the given operator Since only optional fields can actually be empty this type is not available if the left operand field is a mandatory or Boolean field To define an operand of this type 187 select empty or the empty set whichever is available from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes invisible because there is no more information required about the right operand e Check for certain lookup table entry Only available if the left operand is of type Field and the corresponding field is of type Single Select The right operand is a fixedly selected entry from the lookup table that the left operand field is associated with To define an operand of this type select the list entry from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes a drop down list too filled out with all values from the lookup table that is associated with the left operand field Select one of the values to use from the drop down list e Check for certain lookup table entry set Only available if the left
285. ponding four two or one digit value year4d yearZ month2 day2 year4 ESR nae Preview of conversion for Sep 1 2002 08 04 06 AM day2 dayl 03 01 2002 Figure 136 Parameter Type Date and or Time End User s View Define Recipients Ovtions Source Source Details Cancel Input Yalues for Target Group Parameters Enter values for all parameters of the selected target group mm dd yyyy enter the opt in date mm Important Note This database format always requires a 24h time format from 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 This input type cannot be used to generate a database time format that includes AM PM information with hours from 1 to 12 It is also not possible to generate a database date format where the month or day of the week is given in long text like Monday December 2nd 2003 If such a time format is necessary use the Edit Field type instead and let the end user input the date and time manually in the format required by the database use the parameter s description field to tell end users which format they need to use to be compatible with the database 144 Section 19 Using Enabled Target Groups in the Recipients Wizard Once Recipient target groups have been created and enabled by the data Administrator they can be used in the recipients wizard to define recipients for an e mail job For more information on using the recipients wizard see Section 4 Defining Re
286. presented in the tree with the symbol and the textual representation OR Combine conditions with AND then negate the result The negated version of the AND combination described above If the normal AND results in true this negated version results in false As a result the combination is true if at least one sub node is false no matter if all others are true If all sub nodes are true the combination is then false The negated AND combination is represented in the tree with the symbol D and the textual representation NOT AND Combine conditions with OR The negated version of the OR combination described above If the normal OR results in true this negated version results in false As a result the combination is true only if all sub nodes are false If even a single sub node is true the combination is then false The negated OR combination is 182 represented in the tree with the symbol and the textual representation NOT OR The type of a combination operator can be changed for the node at any time using the Change Operator Type action menu entry When doing a Copy amp Paste of a combination node the node and its whole subtree including all sub nodes and their sub nodes will be copied Similarly when doing a Cut amp Paste the node and its whole subtree will be removed from the original location and added at the paste location Note Cer
287. ptional If no category is selected or created target groups are placed into lt No Category gt Figure 122 Target Group Wizard General Target Group Definition General Source Save amp Exit Next gt General Enter the target group name and the description You may optionally supply a category Type the name of the new category here Name LISTSERV selects by city Category LISTSERY Lists Select Existing Category Click here to enter add a new category Description LISTSERV selects recipients from the customer database who have elected to receive the Newsletter Category lt No Category gt hal A thorough description will help users select the best target groups for their jobs Click Next gt to continue 17 2 Source On the Source screen of a target group where LISTSERV retrieves the recipients from a database enter the database server if the default database as configured in LISTSERV is not going to be used For more information about configuring databases for LISTSERV see Section 4 DBMS and Mail Merge Support in the 1 8 e LISTSERV Developers Manual 129 Enter the SQL statement in the corresponding edit box The statement may be a fixed statement or it may contain parameters that are later filled out by a regular user when this target group is used in a recipients definition If parameters are being used opening and closing tags are used t
288. r specific content into the message based upon the data associated with each subscriber More information on using mail merging can be found in The next tab Reply Behavior determines where any replies from subscribers are sent There are three options available e Sender Replies are sent to the sender of the e mail message The sender address is the address based on the From field of the posting e List Administrator Replies can be sent to the list administrator address This is the address that was entered in the General Options tab under the heading List Administrator E mail Addresses lf there is more than one list administrator each address will receive all replies e Separate address Replies are sent to an address that is entered in the text box of this tab Figure 26 List Wizard for LISTSERV List Reply Behavior List Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List Archive Please define which E Mail address will be used as the reply to address for postings distributed by the LISTSERV list Replies to List Postings Should Go To C Sender according to the From address in the posting C List Administrator Separate Address list help xYZCompany com The next tab Bounce Handling determines what happens to the subscriber addresses when messages sent to them bounce are rejected from the
289. r Settings Stores information about sender profiles drop in content elements Also listed here are individual user preferences and change password options These icons are repeated along the left side of every screen for navigational purposes Section 2 Introduction to Hosted Data Collecting and storing recipient data is one of LISTSERV Maestro s most powerful new features Organizations without a separate database can collect information from their mail recipients and store that data directly inside LISTSERV Maestro This information can be used to create customized e mail messages and give recipients control over their subscription settings Incorporated into this feature is the ability to create classic LISTSERV lists from the LISTSERV Maestro interface combining the features of LISTSERV within the easy to use LISTSERV Maestro interface The data administrator structures the way recipient data is collected by designing the dataset Designing the dataset involves selecting the types of data to be collected and the names for column headers and for each column of data It also involves setting limitations and input validations for the collected data As the data administrator is designing the fields for recipient data LISTSERV Maestro is also creating a form that can be made available on the Web so that recipients can sign up to receive mail and control their list subscriptions Scripting is done automatically by the system so that informa
290. r details For information on setting conditions for a LISTSERV list see the LISTSERV Developer s Guide available online at http www soft com resources manuals asp Figure 94 Source Details for Special List Message Target Group Definition General Source Source Details a Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Source Details Specify a conditional expression that will be evaluated by LISTSERV and check list subscription options Send to LISTSERY List DEVELOP XYZ Options MW malL I DIGEST F INDEX I NOMAIL Condition amp pet cat OR dog he LISTSERV Developer s Guide has information on setting conditions Parameter placeholders in the LISTSERY list condition are enclosed by the following tags Opening Tag Closing Tag Click Next gt to continue 14 4 Parameters The Parameters screen will only open if the target group is set up to send mail as a standard list message with the topics that are exposed as a parameter or the target group is set up to send mail as a special list message containing a condition with parameters 14 4 1 LISTSERV Topics as Parameters A target group definition that uses the topics of a LISTSERV list as a parameter allows the regular users to select which topic or topics to use in the recipient definition of their e mail jobs Fill out the parameter details by giving the parameter a label and a description Thes
291. r from the dataset Figure 64 Edit List Subscriber Edit Subscriber List Specific Fields Here you can change the list specific data of the subscriber with the e mail address Bob maestro demo soft com for the list NEWS FROM Shared Recipient Dataset Fields E Mail Address First name Last name Screen name Number of YZ products currently owned Date of birth Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Leave unchecked for text mail List Specific Fields Check the box if you are a developer LISTSERY Topics The subscriber will only receive messages for the topics checked below 0 DEVELOPERS M INSTRUCTORS PARENTS CHILDREN T ART LANGUAGE M MUSIC M MATH mail Without Topics Values marked with an asterisk lt gt are mandatory OK Cancel Use this link to open the dataset fields for editing Bob maestro dema lsoft cam Bob Bouchard look up 99 Change any list specific fields in the lower part of this screen Delete removes the subscriber from the list but not from the dataset 9 1 2 Filtering Members Locating members within a large dataset can be easily accomplished by using the filtering system available on the Manage Members of a Recipient Dataset screen Locating members within a large list can be accomplished using the filtering system on the Manage Members of Host List screen Filtering works the same way for members and subscribers A fun
292. r is still editing it Complete This target group has been completed but the target group has not been enabled for use A target group in this state has been completed by the data administrator or automatically created by the system for hosted lists but is not open for users to select it for recipient definition Enabled This target group has been completed and has been enabled for use in the recipients wizard A target group in this state is complete and has been enabled for use as a recipient definition Below the list that displays the target groups in the selected category are links to manipulate the category itself Delete Category Allows the currently selected category to be deleted Only available if the current category is empty Not available for lt No Category gt or lt Hosted Lists Default Target Groups gt Rename Category Allows the name of the currently selected category to be changed Not available for lt No Category gt or lt Hosted Lists Default Target Groups gt 12 2 Selecting the Type of Target Group To create a new target group scroll to the bottom of the screen and find the drop down menu that says Create a new target group with recipients based on Select one of the five ways to create a new target group and then click the Create button A target group wizard will initiate the process of creating the new target group Wizard pages will appear different for the differen
293. r may be rejected as invalid If there is a need to include the quote character inside of the value of a field then this character must be escaped Escape the quote character by using it twice in direct succession The double appearance of the quote character will be interpreted as a single appearance that is part of the field value Follow these basic rules for separator and quote characters e If the first character in the field is the quote character then LISTSERV Maestro assumes the field is quoted and the next not escaped quote character marks the end of the field The end of the field must then be followed by a separator character or by the end of a line trailing white space after the last field of the line is allowed 167 e If the first character in a field is not the quote character then LISTSERV Maestro assumes the field is not quoted and the next appearance of the separator character marks the end of the field Here are some examples Simple values separated by comma not quoted John Doe Denver USA Lucy Summers London UK Karl Hauser Frankfurt DE This defines a dataset with three rows each row consisting of four fields Simple values separated by comma not quoted with empty fields John Denver USA Summers London UK Karl Hauser Frankfurt This defines a dataset with three rows each row consisting of four fields In the first row the second field is empty in the second row the firs
294. rce screen See Figure 4 for the exact location of the edit boxes Parameter placeholders must follow these specific rules to function correctly Any occurrence of a pair of the currently defined opening and closing tags will be interpreted as a placeholder The opening and closing tags themselves are also considered part of the placeholder The text between the tags is considered the parameter name Any string of characters can be used between the tags becoming the parameter name The same parameter name can be used for several placeholders with certain restrictions see below In this case they are simply considered multiple occurrences of the same parameter all of which will be replaced with the same value once the placeholders are replaced with the regular user s selection A placeholder can be used in any position in the SQL statement The most common locations for placeholders however are in comparisons in the where clause of the statement A placeholder that is not enclosed with string literal quotes as in age gt from is considered an integer parameter because the entire placeholder is replaced with the value so that it becomes for example age gt 30 The value must be an integer otherwise the execution of the statement will result in an error or in unexpected results A placeholder that is enclosed with string literal quotes as in city name is considered a non integer parameter a string or
295. reating parameters in SQL statements Both use special tags to set the name of the element or parameter off from the rest of the text Tags for drop ins and parameters follow very similar rules 3 1 2 Hosted Data Requirements The data administrator s role in collecting recipient data hosted within LISTSERV Maestro is to establish the types of data collected and design the way this information is gathered The data administrator also creates mailing lists for regular users to send e mail messages to recipients The data administrator designs the types of mailing lists and designates to which user accounts these lists are available LISTSERV Maestro takes the hard work out of creating a dataset and lists but it cannot do the planning Before creating a dataset and lists the data administrator needs to think about the answers to these questions How will this dataset be used What data will the subscribers need to provide so that the mailings can be precisely targeted and customized What data will they be willing to provide What data will need to be collected for all members and what data are needed only for particular lists What kinds of target groups will be needed What questions will the job reports need to be able to answer What types of lists will be needed Only announcement lists or will there also be a need for discussion lists For announcement lists will mailings only be sent to all subscribers or will there be a ne
296. red Date with format field mm dd yyyy HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted Boolean n a shared field mail Leave unchecked for text mail NEWEST Name of most recent XYZ product Single Select Optional shared purchased XYZ Products field 4 1 2 Creating a Lookup Table Lookup tables are fields of data that are shared across datasets in a warehouse When used wisely they can save time and resources by reusing a single set of data for many datasets and lists For example a list of countries of the world can be used to create a lookup table If this information is collected by several lists or datasets in a warehouse making a lookup table containing a list of countries once will make this available to all datasets and lists To create a new lookup table click on the Lookup Tables tab from the Recipient Warehouse screen see Figure 4 Next click the Create New Lookup Table button Enter a name for the lookup table select the encoding for the data in the table and type in a description of the contents of the table Click OK to continue 15 Figure 10 Create a New Empty Lookup Table Lookup Table Use this page to create a new empty lookup table Click OK to create the list Click Cancel to return to the recipient warehouse page Name Countries Encoding ASCII z Description Countries of the world OK Cancel Each lookup table requires an entry that becomes the default valu
297. related iso639 txt for a list of the ISO 639 language codes count rycode Type Text An uppercase two letter ISO 3166 country code specifying the country for the locale See for example http userpage chemie fu berlin de diverse doc ISO_3166 html for a list of the ISO 3316 country codes If Langcode and count rycode are specified they are used to create a locale for the given language and country and any locale specific text in dat etext will be expected according to this locale Examples ToMillis February 22 2004 MMMM dd yyyy parses the given date using the default U S locale ToMillis Februar 22 2004 MMMM dd yyyy Germany parses the given date using the pre defined locale for Germany ToMillis februari 22 2004 MMMM dd yyyy de AT parses the given date using a custom locale for language de Germany and country AT Austria 161 ToNum Function Tries to parse a number from the given text string Return Type Number ToNum text and returns that number Generates an error if the provided text string does not contain a valid number for example letters Can be used to convert a profile field which is of type text but still only contains numbers to the type number which can then be used in contexts that require the type number such as number operators and functions requiring a number argument
298. resentation that displays the condition in short form The Edit Condition dialog box shows several drop down lists and possibly edit fields or selection boxes that allow for the definition of the condition for the node In the dialog box the selection controls are organized in a hierarchical order from top to bottom where choices in the upper controls directly influence the available choices in the lower controls Therefore define a condition in a top to bottom manner first making selections in the upper controls then proceeding to the next control and so on until the bottom of the dialog box is reached and the whole condition is completed Generally speaking each condition consists of three parts A left operand an operator and a right operand The operator is always a Boolean operator that compares the left and right operands in a certain fashion and the result is a Boolean value of true or false This operator result is then used as the Boolean state of the condition node In the dialog box these three parts are represented by five controls usually situated above each other The first two controls define the left operand the third control defines the operator and the last two controls define the right operand 183 Which operators are available in the third control and which kinds of right operands can be defined using the last two controls depends on the selections in the first two controls that is what left operand is
299. rganize lists so that they are easier to find See Section 8 Organizing Data Sets for more information The right frame displays all the settings for the open dataset Clicking the Actions link will open a menu containing links to other functions that can be performed on the dataset Click on the Create Hosted Recipient List link to open the hosted recipient list definition wizard 18 Figure 13 Recipient Dataset Details Recipient Dataset Details Name XYZ Company Description XYZ Customer Center Members 0 0 yet unconfirmed Open to everyone Encoding West European ISO 1 Shared Fields EMAIL FNAME LNAME USERNAME Text Text Text Text SOFTWARE DOB HTML Number Text Boolean Fields formatted in bold are mandatory fields which the member must fill out B EATE EAEN z Dataset Info Edit Dataset Settings Create Hosted Recipient List Create Hosted LISTSERY List Create Category Browse Edit Confirmed Members Add Single Member Modify Members by Upload Download all Members Subscriber Access URLs Subscriber Access Template Delete Dataset Click Next gt to continue gt Important Note Clicking the Actions link in the right frame as described in Section 4 1 3 Editing Existing Datasets can make changes to the dataset itself Once lists have been added to a dataset it will not be possible to edit most of the settings for
300. rm e General time zone For formatting the time zone is handled as Text if it has a name If not it is given as a GMT offset value in the format GMT HH MM where HH is the hours between 0 and 23 one or two digits may be zero padded to the left and Mm is the minutes between 00 and 59 always two digits zero padded to the left if necessary For example GMT 8 00 GMT 08 00 GMT 12 45 For parsing see Time zone parsing below e RFC 822 time zone For formatting the RFC 882 4 digit time zone format is used HHMM where HH is the hours as two digits between 00 and 23 zero padded to 165 the left if necessary and MM is the minutes as two digits between 00 and 59 zero padded to the left if necessary For parsing see Time zone parsing below e Time zone parsing For parsing of a time zone it does not matter if the format pattern specifies a General time zone or a RFC 822 time zone In both cases all three types of time zone specifications are accepted Time zone given as Text if given with a name recognized by LISTSERV Maestro Time zone given as GMT offset see General time zone Time zone given as RFC 882 4 digit notation see RFC 822 time zone Examples The following examples show how date and time patterns are interpreted in the default U S locale with the U S Pacific Time time zone
301. rresponding links on the right side of the table Fields that belong to the dataset cannot be moved or edited from this screen Figure 46 LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Fields LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field Fields Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt General Profile Fields The list below displays the shared fields of the recipient dataset together with the profile fields of the LISTSERY list Click Add Field to add a new field to the list Click on the links next to the list field to select it for editing or to remove the field from the list Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field These fields LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field belong to the USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field dataset and SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field Cannot be DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared fied Changed Hm a eg eer alert dls ag ce care ty TOM TNS JBETATEST Check box if interested in beta testing Boolean Mandatory E Reset Remove add Field Use this link to add a field to the list Click Next gt to continue 49 7 3 3 Profile Field Details for Moderated Discussion Lists The next screen in the wizard is Profile Field Details Hosted LISTSERV lists require a full name be define
302. rs listed to the right of the edit field Each format placeholder will later be replaced with the corresponding date time value in the corresponding format 142 The possible format placeholders are year4 Will be replaced with a four digit representation of the year value entered by the end user for example 2002 Available only if a date input format was selected year2 Will be replaced with a two digit representation of the year value entered by the end user for example 02 Available only if a date input format was selected month2 Will be replaced with a two digit representation of the month value entered by the end user for example 09 or 12 Available only if a date input format was selected month1 Will be replaced with a one or two digit representation of the month value entered by the end user with months January to September as one digit and months October to December as two digits for example 9 or 12 Available only if a date input format was selected day2 Will be replaced with a two digit representation of the day value entered by the end user for example 01 or 31 Available only if a date input format was selected day1 Will be replaced with a one or two digit representation of the day value entered by the end user with days 1 to 9 as one digit and days 10 to 31 as two digits for example 1 or 31 Available only if a date input format was selected hour2 Will
303. ry value not equal to the False value in the edit box A false value can be registered by selecting one of the options e False is every value that is equal to the value entered in the edit box e False is every value not equal to the True value in the edit box 77 Three valid combinations of these options are possible e A value representing true is specified and a value representing false is specified This combination will assign the corresponding Boolean values to all rows that have the specific true and false values Any rows that do not have the specified true and false values will be skipped as invalid and can be downloaded from the Results Statistics screen after the upload is completed e A value representing true is specified and the false is every value that is not equal to the true value This combination will assign the true value to those rows that have the specified value and assign false to all other rows e A value representing false is specified and true is every value that is not equal to the false value This combination will assign the true value to all those rows that do not have the false value and false to all the rows that have the specified false value In the second step of Boolean field mapping select which filed to apply the values to by clicking the name of the field If there are multiple Boolean fields that will use the same definitions click the l
304. s already a member so you only need to fill out the list profile fields The member profile fields are already completed in the table below and reflect your current settings piee Pane Subscriber is already a member lesie Last name of the dataset so all the dataset pp s S CCTTT Bean RNA fields are automatically filled in Number of XYZ products currently owned Date of birth Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Leave unchecked for text mail jz Check the box if you are a developer T The mailing list offers you a choice between the following topics Please check t topics you want to subscribe to You will only receive messages which specify a topic that you have subscribed DEVELOPERS J INSTRUCTORS J PARENTS CHILDREN M ART I LANGUAGE List specific fields will be editable and any mandatory fields must be filled in T MUSIC T MATH to subscribe to the list M Also receive messages which do not specify any topic Cancel Back to Step 1 10 3 Sending Mail to Hosted Lists Sending mail to a hosted list can be accomplished once the list is complete and subscribers are added The method for sending mail can be different depending on the type of hosted list For hosted LISTSERV lists regular users that have permission can send mail directly to any hosted LISTSERV list by selecting Send to an Existing LISTSERV Lis using the recipients definition wizard when defining the recipients
305. s are created and named by LISTSERV Maestro They can be used to add a login or unsubscribe URL to message content They can even be used to perform calculations on existing subscriber and system data such as adding a subscribe date and time calculating subscribers ages or birthdays Combined with conditional blocks and calculation formulas system drop ins provide a potent method for personalizing and targeting e mail messages For more information on system drop ins see the following sections in the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual e Section 11 2 Creating and Managing Drop In Content Elements e Appendix E Using Conditional Blocks e Appendix F Advanced Use of System Drop ins e Appendix G Calculation Formulas Section 1 Introduction to LISTSERV Maestro 2 0 Designed specifically to work with LISTSERV 14 4 or later LISTSERV Maestro allows users to collect and store recipient data so it can be used to easily create and send personalized e mail messages All interaction with LISTSERV Maestro takes place using an intuitive Web interface Incorporated into the powerful tool is a tracking component that can collect data every time a recipient opens an e mail message or clicks on a URL contained within the message The LISTSERV Maestro program is comprised of three components that work together e The Administration Hub Controls all user and program settings The HUB is the central component that stores registry and account informa
306. s be entered the same way as when using the underlying recipients type in the recipients wizard Optionally the SQL statement may be parameterized Using parameters in the SQL statement allows the user to define variables in the recipient wizard when this target group is used for a recipient definition For more information on using parameters see Section 16 3 Section 18 Defining Parameters The option selected here will determine the way the recipient target group wizard will look and what kinds of information will be needed to complete the wizard 12 3 The Recipient Target Group Wizard The target group wizard takes the data administrator through all the steps necessary to define the settings of the target group The top row of the wizard displays links to each of the screens necessary to complete the wizard The open screen is marked with a highlighted background Depending on the choices made on some of the wizard screens other screens may become disabled or be displayed differently If a wizard screen is disabled it means that the screen is not necessary with the current selections and can be safely ignored When the wizard is entered for the first time for a newly created target group it is necessary to click Finish or Save amp Exit in the wizard to create the target group Exiting the wizard by clicking Cancel clicking any of the navigational icons or by closing the browser will not create a new target group If the wizard is exited
307. s from the list if they are not included in the uploaded file Remove from List Removes the subscribers from the list that are specified by the uploaded file Click Next gt to continue 9 3 1 2 Type Details The next screen in the wizard is called Type Details Type Details defines the details for the selected modification type This screen may not be available for all modification types For modifying datasets the following details are available Modification Type Type Details Available Add to Dataset No Details Available Update in Dataset Overwrite Manual Changes If members have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded values No keep values of manually changed members 70 Modification Type Type Details Available Synchronize with Dataset select the desired option button Overwrite Manual Changes If members have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded values No keep values of manually changed members Full Synchronize with Dataset select the desired option button Overwrite Manual Changes If members have changed their settings since the last upload modification will their changes be overwritten Yes overwrite manual changes with uploaded v
308. s not available for numbers it begins with ends with or contains then both operands are converted to text so that the operator can be applied Right Operand For the right operand the available choices also depend on which left operand has been selected The following choices may be available Field Available if applicable The right operand is one of the profile fields available in the hosted recipient list the target group is based on To define an operand of this type select the field from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes a drop down list as well so that the field to use can be selected This second list will automatically only contain fields of a type that are compatible to the left operand and the operator The type Field may not be available as the right operand if there is no field that matches the datatype defined by the left operand or if the left operand is also a field but is the only field of that datatype comparisons with the same field used both for the left and right operand are not allowed Number Only available if the left operand is of type Field and the corresponding field is of type Number The right operand is a constant number To define an operand of this type select the number from the drop down list at fourth position The last control then becomes an edit field where you now enter the number value to use Text Only available if the left operand is
309. s such as upgrades and bug fixes will be annoucened here New product release schedules and calls for beta testers will also be distributed E Click Next gt to continue 7 1 2 Profile Fields for LISTSERV Announcement List The second wizard screen is called Profile Fields Every new list begins with the fields in the dataset Other fields can be added to the list Any added list fields will not be shared among the other lists in the dataset To add a new field click the Add Field link For each new field enter the following information e Name The name of the field as it will be used internally by the system for mail merging and querying Field names can only use upper and lower case letters A Z and a z the numbers 0 9 and the underscore _ Spaces and other special characters are not allowed e Display Name The display name is the label that identifies the blank field on the web form The display name will be seen by anyone accessing the list s public subscription page on the Web All alphanumeric characters are permitted as well as spaces and most special characters e Data Type Choose the type of data to be entered in the field from the drop down menu Three different classifications of data are available selection lists are not available for hosted LISTSERV lists Text Text fields can accept any type of text including dates in specific formats such as dd mm yyy or mm dd yyyy
310. se will be ignored by the system It will not be possible to use mail merging Tracking for the message will be limited to blind tracking meaning that the tracking data available from the job will not be associated with identifiable individuals or other demographic information It is possible to enter an address and optional name for the To field in the message header see Figure 119 16 6 2 Recipient Identification Columns In order to process an e mail job LISTSERV Maestro needs to know which column represents the recipients e mail addresses Use the drop down menus to select the E mail Column When additional recipient data is being used for mail merging it is possible to select the Name Column as well see Figure 118 This drop down menu will not appear when sending bulk e mail see Figure 119 16 6 3 Header Definition Headers are specially defined rows in databases Headers are used by database tables to label the columns of data so that the system and the user can correctly identify the columns Recipient data files containing a header will be sorted or parsed by LISTSERV Maestro based on that header row and the table reflected on the screen will have the columns labeled It is possible to edit the existing headers for an uploaded text file in order to make them easier to use in mail merging Changing the headers in LISTSERV Maestro will not change the headers in the original text file If the recipient data file does
311. sers can select which topic or topics to use in their job definitions Use topics as selected above 100 All subscribers ignore topics The message will be sent to all list subscribers regardless of their topic selections This setting will override topic settings of list subscribers and should be used with care Send to subscribers with no topics or with the OTHER topic The message will be sent to list subscribers who have no topics selected or with the OTHER topic Hide or expose the selected topics in the subject line of the message by selecting the corresponding option button If the list subscribers are aware of the topics and are accustomed to using them they automatically move list messages to folders on their local computers then consider exposing the topics in the subject line However if there are many topics selected for the message a rather lengthy subject line will result In this case consider hiding the topics from the recipients Hiding topics can also be useful if the topics are only used to sub divide the list and are not used by the recipients Figure 92 Source Details for Standard List Message Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Source Details Specify how LISTSERV will use the lists topics to determine which subscriber will receive the e mail Send to LISTSERY List DEVELOP XYZ Send only to s
312. set contains some values of superset amp The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand contains some values of the set defined by the right operand Alternatively if the intersection of the left operand set and the right operand set is not empty NOT is the same set as not equals The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand is not equal to the set defined by the right operand NOT contains only values of not subset lt The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand contains some values which do not appear in the set defined by the right operand Alternatively if the left operand set is not a subset of the right operand set NOT contains all values of not superset gt The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand does not contain all values of the set defined by the right operand Alternatively if the left operand set is not a superset of the right operand set NOT contains some values of not superset amp The condition is true if the value set selected in the field defined as the left operand does not contain any of the values of the set defined by the right operand Alternatively if the intersection of the left operand set and the right operand set is empty The subset and superset operators described above and their negated
313. some control over what recipients are retrieved from the database for each job Using parameters also reduces the number of individual SQL statements that need to be written for jobs e The data administrator does not need to be involved with any other parts of e mail jobs e Specific recipient target groups can be removed from use without deleting them They can be reinstated whenever desired e Recipient target groups can be organized into categories for easy recognition 3 1 Role of the Data Administrator In order to assume effectively the role of a data administrator in LISTSERV Maestro it is necessary to have access to and information about the systems involved It is also helpful to understand the types of recipient data being collected and how it may be used in e mail jobs All data administrators need e ALISTSERV Maestro user account with the right to administer target group and hosted recipient data enabled The LISTSERV Maestro administrator can create this type of account For more information see Section 9 2 Editing Account Information and Assigning Single User Settings in the LISTSERV Maestro Administrator s Manual 3 1 1 External Database Requirements Data administrators setting up connections with an external database and sending queries through LISTSERV Maestro or through LISTSERV to retrieve recipients need e To understand how the institution s data is stored and organized including table names and re
314. ssions In addition if the field s value is empty or undefined the type will be determined by the type of the given default Make sure that the type of the default matches the field s type or is at least convertible into that type see Automatic Type Conversion Function Expressions Restriction Functions can usually be used in any formula However there may be individual restrictions that apply only to certain functions See the function descriptions for details Type The type depends on each function See the function descriptions for details Usage To include a function in a formula simply type the function name possibly followed by an argument list in parenthesis See the function description for details concerning whether arguments are required by a certain function and what they mean Note that function names are case sensitive and that any parenthesis enclosing the argument list must follow the function name without any space in between Examples Abs 20 Max 15 amp AGE ToLower Convert this string to ALL Lowercase Min 10 11 amp SIZE_A amp SIZE_B Available Functions The currently available functions are described in Formula Functions Operators Operators always work on two operands which may be any valid expressions Some operators require their operand expressions to be of the type number while others require them to be of the type text 152 Op
315. st Options Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling List 4rchive Please define the archive behavior of the LISTSERV list Archive Postings to This List Disabled Enabled Create new archive files Every week 7 The Archive will be viewable by Anyone C Subscribers only C Administrators only Click Next gt to continue 7 3 6 Posting Restrictions for Moderated Discussion Lists Posting restrictions for moderated discussion lists set limitations on who can post to the list message attachments message size and the number of messages that can be sent to the list The posting restrictions screen has three tabs Distribution Handling Attachment Handling and Size Message Limits Click each tab to enter its specific settings e Distribution Handling Sets moderator and editor addresses Moderator Addresses This address or addresses will receive postings from subscribers Each address will receive all incoming messages and the first address to approve or reject the message will determine the whether the message is sent to the list for distribution Editor Addresses These additional e mail addresses that have permission to post to the list with out being subscribed to it and without going through moderation Additional addresses are optional Addresses defined as the administrator addresses on the Ge
316. sting one 87 Appendix D contains all the HTML tags and custom styles used by LISTSERV Maestro A sample style sheet used by the default template is also included Section 12 Introduction to Recipient Target Groups The data administrator account can simplify and streamline the use of data sources including databases uploaded text files and e mail lists to select recipients and recipient data to the point where regular account holders do not need to know anything about how and where data is stored To do this the data administrator creates predefined recipients lists complete with a name and description called Recipient Target Groups Regular account holders can use these target groups to select the recipients for their jobs The data administrator builds the recipient target groups by writing SQL statements to retrieve data from a database a data source such as a spreadsheet or in the case of hosted recipient data building a query using the LISTSERV Maestro interface The data administrator also designs the methods regular users employ to select the data in a series of check boxes drop down menus and or text boxes There are many advantages to using recipient target groups e Using recipient data stored in a database can save time and system resources e The database can be continually updated until the time the job is sent ensuring that the most current data is used for the job e Recipient target groups are s
317. t types of target groups Each target group type is described below Hosted Recipient List This target group is based on a hosted recipient list The target group wizard will display all the datasets and their respective hosted recipient lists Once a list is selected the wizard will allow for conditions and parameters to be set in order to segment the list Classic LISTSERV List This target group is based on the recipients type Send to an Existing LISTSERV Lis as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a job For more information on this part of the recipients wizard see Section 4 2 Send to an Existing LISTSERV List in the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual When this target group is selected the target group wizard will display all available LISTSERV lists on the server where LISTSERV Maestro is installed Select a list from the drop down menu and then select the type of LISTSERV message to send standard or mail merge Uploaded Text File This target group is based on the recipients type Upload a Recipients Text File as available in the recipients wizard during recipients definition of a 90 job For more information on this part of the recipients wizard see Section 4 5 Upload a Recipient s Text File in the LISTSERV Maestro User s Manual The file can be uploaded into the system while the wizard is engaged storing the recipients at that time or a server file can be uploaded just
318. t be displayed with one of the ISO 8859 charsets for example Asian characters or there are mixed characters from several ISO 8859 charsets then LISTSERV Maestro will choose Unicode as the charset Once a charset is chosen LISTSERV Maestro encodes each character as a bit sequence according to that charset The e mail that is sent is then augmented by the information of which charset was used to encode it This information is then used by the receiving mail client to decode the bit sequence into characters that can be displayed to the recipient For example with ASCII charset where each 7 bit sequence denotes one character the sequence 1000001 would mean the character with the decimal value 65 which is the Latin A With the ISO 8859 1 charset where each 8 bit sequence denotes one character the sequence 41000100 would mean the character with the decimal value 196 which is the umlaut A However with the ISO 8859 7 charset also 8 bit the same value 196 would mean the Greek letter A instead Consequently the decoding scheme or charset that makes the message readable to the recipient is very important LISTSERV Maestro takes care to include this information in the e mail so that it is not lost during the transfer 172 Appendix D Customizing Subscriber Access Templates This table lists all the HTML tags and custom styles used by LISTSERV Maestro lt body gt lt p gt lt hl gt lt h2 gt
319. t field is empty and in the last row the fourth field is empty Values in which some contain a comma separated by comma quoted with lt gt John Doe Denver Colorado USA Lucy Summers London UK Karl Hauser Frankfurt am Main DE This defines a dataset with three rows each row consisting of four fields The third fields in the first and last rows each have a value that contains a comma Since this comma is inside of the quote characters it is not interpreted as a separator comma but instead as part of the value of the field Values in which some contain a comma separated by comma quoted with lt gt with empty fields John Denver Colorado USA Summers London UK Karl Hauser Frankfurt am Main This defines a dataset with three rows each row consisting of four fields The third fields in the first and last rows each have a value that contains a comma Since this comma is inside of the quote characters it is not interpreted as a separator comma but instead as part of the value of the field Also in each row there is an empty field Values in which some contain a comma and some the quote character separated by comma quoted with lt gt John Hammer Cool Doe Denver Colorado USA Lucy Summers London UK Karl Hauser the man Frankfurt am Main DE This defines a dataset with three rows each row consisting of four fields The third fields in the first and last rows each have
320. t gt General Specify the name and the description of the hosted recipient list Name XYZ Monthly Newsletter Internal Description monthly customer newsletter Public Description Optional Join our monthly XYZ Company Newsletter and receive special online sales announcements product reviews money saving coupons and much more Although optional including a good public description especially when there are multiple lists available can help subscribers find and manage their own settings easily a Click Next gt to continue 6 1 2 Profile Fields The second wizard screen is called Profile Fields Every new list begins with the fields in the dataset Other fields can be added to the list Any added list fields will not be shared among the other lists in the dataset To add a new field click the Add Field link For each new field enter the following information Name The name of the field as it will be used internally by the system for mail merging and querying Field names can only use upper and lower case letters A Z and a z the numbers 0 9 and the underscore _ Spaces and other special characters are not allowed Display Name The display name is the label that identifies the blank field on the web form The display name will be seen by anyone accessing the list s public subscription page on the Web All alphanumeric characters are permitt
321. t sequence into characters that can be displayed to the recipient For example with ASCII charset where each 7 bit sequence denotes one character the sequence 1000001 would mean the character with the decimal value 65 which is the Latin A With the ISO 8859 1 charset where each 8 bit sequence denotes one character the sequence 11000100 would mean the character with the decimal value 196 which is the umlaut A But with the ISO 8859 7 charset also 8 bit the same value 196 would mean the Greek letter A instead Consequently the decoding scheme or charset that makes the message readable to the recipient is very important LISTSERV Maestro takes care to include this information in the e mail so that it is not lost during the transfer Merging Fields with International Character Sets The issue of international character sets in combination with merging fields needs to be considered very carefully to make sure that the results of the merging appear to the recipient as intended The main problem when merging fields containing text using international charsets is to decide which charset to use Potentially the characters in the body of the message require a certain charset while some of the merge values may require a different charset For example a message may have English text as the body of the message but a recipient list with recipients from all over the world with names that contain letters from various langua
322. ta from mailing list subscribers Data administration and mailing list creation now are combined in one interface to allow greater flexibility and control over personalized targeted opt in e mail messaging LISTSERV Maestro can create mailing lists two different ways using recipient data stored by the system called Hosted Recipient Lists or by harnessing the flexibility and interactivity of traditional LISTSERV lists backed by a DBMS called Hosted LISTSERV Lists Both types of lists can use data fields to produce personalized and targeted messages 1 3 How the Manual is Organized With the addition of data hosting the power and scope of LISTSERV Maestro has expanded immensely necessitating the reorganization of this data Administrator s Manual Many new sections have been added covering the new features and explaining their uses The first half of this manual Sections 1 11 cover how LISTSERV Maestro functions to collect and store mail recipients and their accompanying data and how to create the two different types of hosted recipient lists using recipient data The second half of this manual Sections 12 15 covers the creation and administration of recipient target groups For those users who already have recipient data stored in a separate database and will be using LISTSERV Maestro to connect to that recipient data skip ahead to Section 12 Introduction to Recipient Target Groups This section and beyond will demonstrate how to use recipient
323. tain nestings of operator nodes are superfluous and will therefore be removed pruned if the action menu entry Remove Unnecessary Nodes is selected on the root node These include e Empty combination nodes Combination nodes without any sub nodes are always superfluous and are always removed e Combination nodes with one sub node Combination nodes with only a single sub node are superfluous only if the combination node is of the non negated sort a simple AND or OR combination In that case the combination node is removed and its only sub node takes the combination node s place directly in the parent node e Combination nodes with several sub nodes Combination nodes with several sub nodes are superfluous only if the combination node is of the non negated sort a simple AND or OR combination and if the parent node of the combination node is of the same combination type In that case the combination node is removed and all its sub nodes take the combination node s place directly in the parent node Normal Condition Nodes Normal condition nodes derive their Boolean state by examining a condition that is defined explicitly for the given node The condition is defined in a dialog box when the node is first created and can later be edited in the same dialog by selecting the Edit command from the node s Actions on Selected Node menu The condition node is represented in the tree with the symbol and a textual rep
324. te sequences representing them already contain the special MIME header encoding necessary for non ASCII To header fields make sure that only ASCII characters are allowed in recipient names when creating the list or database data for these recipient types LISTSERV Maestro and Bi Directional Character Sets Of the ISO 8859 charset family there are two charsets which contain letters from languages that have a standard reading direction of right to left These are the charsets ISO 8859 6 Arabic and ISO 8859 8 Hebrew both of which are supported by LISTSERV Maestro Actually LISTSERV Maestro will not use the charsets with the names ISO 8859 6 and ISO 8859 8 but will instead use the special bi directional versions SO 8859 6 i and ISO 8859 8 i These charsets contain the same characters as their non i suffix counterparts but the i suffix tells the receiving mail client that the text should be displayed with right to left reading direction Without the i suffix in the charset name many e mail clients would probably display the correct characters but in the for that language incorrect left to right reading direction Even with the i suffix the recipient might require a special mail client version or even a special mail client that is prepared to display text with right to left reading direction properly and is also able to properly display bi directional text text that mixes characters with left to right and chara
325. te all Subscribers USERTYPE Delete List Boolean Fields formatted in italic are shared fields from the recipient dataset which are common to all lists in this dataset Field s formatted in bold are mandatory fields that the subscriber must fil out m 9 1 Managing Members of a Dataset and List Subscribers Members of a dataset and list subscribers can be reviewed their settings changed and they can be deleted by clicking the Browse Edit Confirmed Members link on the actions menu If subscribers of a list are deleted from the list they are not automatically deleted from the dataset However if members are deleted from a dataset they will be deleted from all lists in that dataset The functions and rules for managing dataset members and list subscribers are almost identical and will both be covered in this section Pertinent differences will be pointed out in the text and screen shots The Manage Members of Recipient Dataset screen displays a listing of all the confirmed members of a dataset Confirmed members are those members who have been added to the dataset by the data administrator or have added themselves from the web form and then 61 confirmed their membership using a special e mail message sent to them by LISTSERV Maestro Unconfirmed members are not displayed here Unconfirmed members are those who have joined the membership area or subscribed to a list themselves but have not yet replie
326. ted Discussion Lists The Summary screen displays all the selections made for the LISTSERV list during its creation Use the lt Back button or any of the links in the top bar to revisit any page in the wizard to make changes Click Finish to accept the list as it is summarized and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen As long as there are no subscribers the list settings can be edited from the Recipient Dataset Details screen by selecting the list and clicking the Actions link Before the list can be used its access level needs to be set The list can be set to be accessible to anyone wishing to subscribe to be accessible to only list subscribers or to have no public access If a list is accessible to everyone it will appear on the membership area Web page to anyone visiting that page If the list is accessible only to members the list will not appear in the membership area to everyone it will only appear only to those who are subscribed to the list This essentially closes the list to those who wish to sign themselves up and leaves adding subscribers to the LISTSERV Maestro data administrator while allowing existing subscribers to manage their own settings Lists with no public access do not appear in the membership area to anyone 58 Figure 57 LISTSERV List Wizard Summary LISTSERV List Definition sonarai Profle Profle Fwd er tictontions Posting aaie aaa Save amp Exit lt Back Finish Summary
327. tern MM dd yyyy the text 01 11 12 parses to Jan 11 12 AD For parsing with the abbreviated year pattern y or yy LISTSERV Maestro must interpret the abbreviated year relative to some century It does this by adjusting dates to be within 80 years before and 20 years after the current time For example using the pattern MM dd yy on Jan 1 1997 the text 01 11 12 would be interpreted as Jan 11 2012 while the text 05 04 64 would be interpreted as May 4 1964 During parsing only strings consisting of exactly two digits will be parsed into the default century Any other numeric string such as a one digit string a three or more digit string or a two digit string that is not all digits for example 1 is interpreted literally Therefore 01 02 3 or 01 02 003 are parsed using the same pattern as Jan 2 3 AD Likewise 01 02 3 is parsed as Jan 2 4 BC e Month If the number of pattern letters is one or two the month is interpreted as Number if it is 3 or more it is interpreted as Text Therefore if the month is interpreted as Number or Text the applicable Number Text interpretation rules apply see above For example 1 letter will be a Number that is not padded 2 letters will be a Number that is padded 3 letters will be a Text using the abbreviated form and 4 or more letters will be a Text using the long fo
328. text can be added to describe further the choices regular users have among the different selections available in the target group If there are multiple parameters they can be grouped under headings and their order can be arranged The more description regular users have the easier it will be for them to decide how to use the target groups to select the recipients they want for their e mail jobs If one or more parameters are of the type Restrict values s to floating point numbers the decimal separator that the database uses needs to be defined This will be either a dot period or a comma The selection of dot or comma here only defines how the floating point number will be formatted for replacement in the SQL statement In the recipients wizard the end user will always use a dot as the decimal separator when entering a floating point number 121 Figure 116 Input Layout Target Group Definition Recipients Duplicate General Source Parameters InputLayout Input Preview Details Elimination Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Parameter Details Supply additional information about the target group parameters Change the order of the parameters using the Up and Down links Input Details Enter a heading for the parameter Add optional text to provide more information about the parameter Click Save Entry to accept the changes Heading Mail preference Optional T
329. that dataset 6 1 Hosted Recipient Mailing List Wizard Similar to creating a dataset creating a hosted recipient list is accomplished by using a wizard that details all the steps of designing the list and the accompanying web subscription form The hosted recipient list definition wizard is comprised of four main screens 6 1 1 General Settings The first screen General defines the general information pertaining to the list e Name This is the name of the mailing list Subscribers will see this name for the list on the web form when they subscribe Regular users will see the name of the list in the default hosted list target group that is automatically created when the list is populated with subscribers See Section 13 Hosted Recipient List Target Groups for more details Data administrators will see the list name in the dataset tree see Figure 20 e Internal Description The internal description is seen by users working within the Maestro User Interface e Public Description The public description of the list appears on the subscription web form If subscribers are permitted to select the lists they want to join and can view and change their subscription settings having accurate descriptions will help them accomplish those tasks 19 Figure 14 Hosted Recipient List Wizard General Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Summary ne Save amp Exit Bak Nex
330. the database to be accessed Once a selection has been made the screen will automatically refresh with input boxes for connection parameters The Source screen may appear slightly different for each of the different compatible database types Next enter the connection values required by that plugin such as host name database name password and or TCP IP port These values depend on the database being accessed Enter the SQL statement that will be executed to retrieve the recipients in the corresponding edit box This statement is executed using the connection data specified above The statement may be a fixed statement or it may contain parameters that are later filled out by a regular user when this target group is used in a recipients definition See Section 18 Defining Parameters for more information on how to parameterize the SQL statement and for details about the meaning of the opening and closing tag input fields At the bottom of the screen use the option buttons to define when the SQL statement will be executed e During recipient definition The SQL statement will be executed when this target group is used in the recipients wizard to define the recipients of a job and when the Summary screen of that recipients wizard is entered This means that if the user chooses this target group in the recipients wizard then the list of the actual recipients is defined at the moment the user completes the recipients wizard If the databas
331. the hosted recipient list When a hosted recipient list is created in LISTSERV Maestro and at least one subscriber is added the system automatically creates a target group based on that list This target group includes all subscribers for the hosted list It is named after the name of the hosted recipient list on which it is based and is saved in the category lt Hosted Lists Default Target Groups gt In order to filter this list this target group must first be copied and saved Once copied it can be edited by clicking on its name and entering the target group definition wizard like any other target group For more information on using the target group wizard see Section 12 Introduction to Recipient Target Groups Make any changes desired on the General and Source screens of the wizard and continue to the Source Details screen As an aid for constructing the filtering condition all profile fields available in the hosted recipient list are displayed in the upper part of the wizard page Each profile field is listed with its name and data type Any mandatory fields are rendered in bold Use this list as a reference in order to decide on which fields to define conditions The condition itself is based on Boolean logic meaning that when the condition is applied to a certain subscriber the result of the condition will always be either true in which case the subscriber becomes a recipient of the job in question or false in which case the su
332. the week usually Monday or Sunday and under which circumstances a week that falls partially into one year or month and partially into the next is interpreted as belonging to the one year or month or the other 164 Note The weekday ordinal in month indicates the ordinal number of the weekday of the given date time in the given month For the first Monday in a month the ordinal is 1 as it is for the first Tuesday Wednesday and so on For the second Monday in a month the ordinal is 2 and so on Presentation Description Pattern letters are usually repeated as their number determines the exact presentation e Text For formatting if the number of pattern letters is four or more the full form is used otherwise a short or abbreviated form is used if available For parsing both forms are accepted independent of the number of pattern letters e Number For formatting the number of pattern letters is the minimum number of digits and shorter numbers are zero padded to this amount For parsing the number of pattern letters is ignored unless it is needed to separate two adjacent fields e Year For formatting if the number of pattern letters is two the year is truncated to 2 digits otherwise it is interpreted as a Number see above For parsing if the number of pattern letters is more than two the year is interpreted literally regardless of the number of digits So using the pat
333. they contain attachments any message submitted to the list with attachments will be automatically rejected 55 Figure 54 LISTSERV List Wizard Handling Attachments Posting Restrictions Specify the restrictions that will be applied to postings on the list Distribution Handling Attachment Handling Size Message Limits Handling of Attachments Accept postings even if they contain attachments Accept postings but remove all attachments Reject postings if they contain attachments These restrictions affect the sender of messages to the LISTSERV list when they are submitted as standard list postings A standard list posting is a normal e mail message sent to the list with no mail merging Standard list messages can be received in a digest form and can be viewed in the list archives if archives have been created for the list Standard list messages limit the type of available tracking to blind tracking only e Size Message Limits Sets a size limit for each message posted to the list The size can be limited by the number of lines in the message the number of kilobits KB or the number of megabits MB of the message The total number of messages allowed to be posted to the list for the day can be set as well as the total number of postings per user per day Fields left blank will have no limitations imposed Figure 55 LISTSERV List Wizard Size and Message Limits
334. tically subscribed to and some not the list wizard has to be engaged twice once with the box checked for those topics to be added to all subscribers and once with the box unchecked for those topics that will not be added to all subscribers 46 Figure 44 LISTSERV List Wizard Topics LISTSERY List Topics Specify the topics that will be available for the LISTSERV List Topic Name DEVELOPERS lt new gt KE Click the edit link to change the settings INSTRUCTORS lt new gt Edit of the topic PARENTS lt new gt Edit CHILDREN lt new gt Edit Use these links to change the currently defined topic LANGUAGE lt new gt Edit MUSIC lt new gt Edit MATH lt new gt Edit Add a new topic with this link Click Next gt to continue 7 2 8 Summary for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The Summary screen displays all the selections made for the LISTSERV list during its creation Use the lt Back button or any of the links in the top bar to revisit any page in the wizard to make changes Click Finish to accept the list as it is summarized and return to the Recipient Dataset Details screen As long as there are no subscribers the list settings can be edited from the Recipient Dataset Details screen by selecting the list and clicking the Actions link Before the list can be used its access level needs to be set The list can be set to be accessible to anyone wishing to subscribe to be accessi
335. tion It is accessed both by the Maestro User Interface and by Maestro Tracker to store and retrieve settings It has its own administrator user interface e The Maestro User Interface The actual user interface Individuals and groups use it to create and distribute customized e mail messages It is also used to access view and download the collected tracking data e The Maestro Tracker Receives and compiles tracking data from delivered e mail messages In addition to LISTSERV Maestro s three components LISTSERV Maestro also relies on the existence of two other external components e Aninstallation of LISTSERV 14 3 or later e An SMTP server These two components must be configured to work together Optionally LISTSERV Maestro may also be connected to a separate database installation DBMS LISTSERV Maestro can use a separate database to store its own internal data LISTSERV Maestro can also use separate databases to select recipient lists from database tables Supported databases are e Oracle 8i and 9i and compatible versions e DB2 V7 2 and compatible versions e MySQL 3 23 42 and compatible versions e SQL Server 7 0 and 2000 e Any ODBC compliant database for read only access The three LISTSERV Maestro components the two external components and the database may be installed on any combination of hosts from one single host shared by all components to six dedicated hosts one for each component For more inf
336. tion based on a field a number a text string a Boolean value or the value of a formula Depending on the choice different information is required to build the query Parameters can be used so that end users have more flexibility to select targeted recipients For more information see Appendix E Building Hosted Recipient Queries e Add Job Based Condition Job based conditions are used when building a target group based on a reaction to a previous job This is similar to the recipient type Based on a Previous Job in the recipient definition wizard of a job Select whether the recipients were part of the original source job and if so what tracked behavior did they perform or whether the recipients were not part of the original source job e Add Combination Operator Adds another operator to the condition tree Available operators are Combines with AND Combines with OR Combines with AND then negate the result Combines with OR then negate the result For more information on how operators act see Appendix E Building Hosted Recipient Queries e Copy Combination Operator Copies the selected combination operator Figure 85 Target Group Wizard Source Details for Hosted Lists Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Parameters Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt List Subscriber Condition Supply the condition that determines if a list subscriber shall receive the m
337. tion collected on the form is automatically placed in the host data database called a Recipient Warehouse For those users who already have recipient data stored in a separate DBMS the sections on hosted recipient data can be skipped Proceed to Section 12 Introduction to Recipient Target Groups for information and instructions on how to create flexible yet powerful queries that regular users can employ when defining recipients for a mail job Section 3 Data Administration in LISTSERV Maestro The data administrator account can simplify and streamline the use of recipient data and databases for e mail jobs to the point where regular account holders do not need to know anything about how and where data is stored This can be done in several ways LISTSERV Maestro can be set up and used with an external database to collect and store recipient data using its own interface Once configured it is not necessary to in interact directly with the database within the DBMS Recipient lists can be created from this information for regular users to employ when sending e mail jobs LISTSERV Maestro can also use an existing external database to select recipients for e mail jobs The collecting and storing of recipient data takes place independently of LISTSERV Maestro To utilize this method of selecting recipients requires a working knowledge of the DBMS involved as well as knowledge of how the data is organized and how to query the database A web
338. tions Specify additional options of the LISTSERY list General Options Reply Behavior Bounce Handling Please define the archive behavior of the LISTSERV list Archive Postings to This List Disabled Enabled Create new archive files Every week 7 The Archive will be viewable by Anyone C Subscribers only C Administrators only List Archive Click Next gt to continue 7 2 6 Posting Restrictions for Unmoderated Discussion Lists Posting restrictions for unmoderated discussion lists set limitations on who can post to the list message attachments message size and the number of messages that can be sent to the list The posting restrictions screen has three tabs Distribution Handling Attachment Handling and Size Message Limits Click each tab to enter its specific settings Distribution Handling Sets additional e mail addresses that have permission to post to the list with out being subscribed to it Additional addresses are optional Addresses General Settings screen are allowed to defined as the administrator addresses on the post with out being subscribed Figure 41 LISTSERV List Wizard Distribution Handling LISTSERY List Definition Profile Profile Field e a Prone Fie ct Ty z Posting d a d 2 2 General Fields Details List Type List Options Restrictions Topics Summary Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Post
339. u defined when you submitted your request to join Once logged in you will be able to manage all your mailing list subscriptions and subscription profiles Click here to go to the login page A confirmed member s login page will appear without the Confirmation Required warning Members can subscribe and unsubscribe to any mailing lists that appear on the My Lists tab Members can edit their profiles change their passwords and unregister from the My Profile tab Unregistering from a membership area removes the member from the dataset and unsubscribes them from all lists in that dataset 82 Figure 77 Membership Area for Confirmed Member XYZ Company Logout Join our XYZ Company Customer Care Center to stay informed on all the new products showcasing this season Sign up to beta test our new software join our discussion lists to talk about your favorite XYZ product My Lists My Profile XYZ Company Logout r F P EEF Join our XYZ Company Customer Care Center to stay informed on all the new products pubscoled ESENAME Action Description showcasing this season Sign up to beta test our new software join our discussion lists to talk NEWS FROM Subscribe Join our news list for XYZ customers about your favorite XYZ product Breaking news for users and developers such as upgrades and bug fixes will be annoucened here New product release schedules and calls for beta testers will also be distributed
340. uages has the umlauts A O and U at the positions 196 214 and 220 In comparison ISO 8859 7 mapping the Greek alphabet has the Greek letters A and at the same positions The following charsets from the ISO 8859 family are currently supported by LISTSERV Maestro e ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 West European e ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 East European e 1S0 8859 3 Latin 3 South European e ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 North European e 1S0O 8859 5 Cyrillic e 1IS0 8859 6 Arabic 193 e 1S0 8859 7 Greek e 1S0 8859 8 Hebrew e 1S0 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish e T1IS0 8859 15 Latin 9 West European update of Latin 1 with some French and Finnish letters that were omitted in Latin 1 plus the Euro currency symbol instead of the international currency symbol 2 e UTF 8 International Unicode encoded in UTF 8 format Unicode is a very large charset with room for almost all characters of many different languages of the world even the many Asian characters The 8 bit range of 0 255 is not enough to accomodate all letters from even the European languages at once therefore there is a need for more than a dozen different members of the ISO 8859 family Also 8 bit charsets do not take into account the other major language groups of the world such as Asian languages To address the limitations of 8 bit charsets recently the 16 bit charset Unicode with a range for 65536 characters has become more and more widespread This charset contains
341. ubscriber Return Type Number subscribed to the hosted recipient list referenced by the target group in whose context the formula is used represented in milliseconds since Jan qs 1970 00 00 00 GMT SubscribeTimeMillis Restriction Can only be used in formulas in the condition tree of a Hosted Recipient List target group or in a Calc system drop in together with recipients based on such a target group Will not be accepted in formulas for a different recipient type Arguments None Examples SubscribeTimeMillis 157 Substring Substring orig inaltext startindex endindex Function Returns a text substring that has been extracted from the given original text string according to the other argument s specified The substring begins with the character in originaltext at the position specified If no endindex is given the substring extends to the end of the original string If endindex is given the substring extends to the character at position endindex 1 Le the character at endindex is the first character that is not part of the substring Note all indices are zero based e the index of the last character in the original string is at the position length of original string minus 1 by startindex Return Type Text Arguments originaltext Type Text The original text string
342. ubscribers with the following topics SINDOWS Click this link to open the topics eselected topics will not be visible to the recipients selection screen and choose which topics to use emt definition the topics settings specified above can be used as is or aiternaavelit the topics choices can be exposed as a user parameter Expose as parameter and allow user to choose from the topics selected above Use topics as selected above Bere Decide to use the selected C All subscribers ignore topics topics asa parameter or not Send to subscribers with no topics or with the OTHER topic 101 Figure 93 Selecting Topics for a Standard List Message Target Group Definition 4 subscriber will receive the e mail only if the list subscription options Save amp 4 contain any of the topics that you have checked below k C winpows DC mac D LINUX Source Betali Select All The selected topics will not be visible to the recipients C The selected topics are visible as a prefix in the subject line List c Cancel 14 3 2 Special List Messages There are four Options for a LISTSERV list that can be set by checking the adjacent boxes The options are standard LISTSERV settings that subscribers may have set for their subscriptions e MAIL Will deliver the message to all normally subscribed users e DIGEST Will deliver the message to users that receive only a
343. up Definition ecipients summary etails Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt General Source R Recipients Details Specify the names of the recipient identification and additional merge columns Recipient Identification Columns Select the names of the columns that identify the recipients e mail address and name E mail Column femail Name Column fusername optional Additional Merge Columns Enter the names of the additional columns that will be used for mail merging one per row Merge Columns fname a optional Iname software DOB HTML z Click Next gt to continue 17 7 Summary The Summary screen displays all the important details about the target group for verification The screen is split into categories listing the relevant details for each part of the target group A target group that has been created by the data administrator is not automatically enabled for use in the recipients wizard The data administrator must explicitly enable the use of each target group Target groups need to be enabled individually giving the target group administrator control over the use of each target group This way groups can be created in advance and only enabled when needed Similarly target groups can be disabled preventing users from accessing them without permanently deleting them 133 To enable a target group check the box labeled Yes allow the
344. urrent recipient before the result of the formula is calculated for that recipient To be able to do this calculation the expression s type is determined as follows e If the formula is used in a Calc system drop in together with recipients based on such a target group then the type of each merge field is already defined by the profile field s type which was defined during creation of the associated hosted recipient list Profile fields of type Number have the expression type number 150 Profile fields of type Text have the expression type text Profile fields of type Single Selection have the expression type text Profile fields of type Boolean and Multiple Selection are not allowed to be used in formulas at all This determination of the type is already done during parsing of the formula e If the formula is used in a Calc system drop in with the recipients types uploaded CSV text file or LISTSERV Maestro selects from a database then the type of the field is determined by the field s content as follows If the field s content can be interpreted as a number the type number will be used If it cannot be interpreted as a number or is empty the type text will be used empty content will become an empty text string Consequently to use the merge field in a location of the formula where a number type is required make
345. urrently very active needs to be carefully considered so a major disruption does not occur A better strategy would be to temporarily close the hosted LISTSERV list for maintenance see Summary page adjust the topics and then re open the list When adding new topics to a list that already has subscribers an additional checkbox option Existing subscribers will have the new topics selected automatically will appear Check this option to add all the existing subscribers to the new topics automatically When left unchecked existing subscribers will not be subscribed to the new topics Subscribers will be able to change their settings to add or drop the new topics when they wish This checkbox option applies to all topics that are added on this page during the same list wizard session To add several topics some of which the current subscribers are automatically subscribed to and some not the list 34 wizard has to be engaged twice once with the box checked for those topics to be added to all subscribers and once with the box unchecked for those topics that will not be added to all subscribers Figure 31 LISTSERV List Wizard Topics LISTSERY List Topics Specify the topics that will be available for the LISTSERV List Topic Name DEVELOPERS lt new gt Edit Click the edit link to change the settings INSTRUCTORS lt new gt Edit of the topic PARENTS lt new gt Edit CHILDREN lt new gt Edit ART Use these links to c
346. wed to post back to the list e Unmoderated Discussion List This type of list is used for open discussion among list subscribers and any LISTSERV Maestro senders Communication is two way originating from both subscribers and LISTSERV Maestro senders Postings go directly to the list without being reviewed or edited e Moderated discussions This type of list is used for a controlled discussion among subscribers and any LISTSERV Maestro senders Postings sent to the list from subscribers are reviewed by a moderator who can approve the message for distribution to the rest of the list or reject the posting so it is not sent on the rest of the list subscribers Messages originating from LISTSERV Maestro are not subject to moderation Once the list is created in the hosted recipient list wizard it can be edited outside of LISTSERV Maestro using LISTSERV either with WA or without This is an advanced skill for those administrators familiar with LISTSERV If any changes to the list header are made outside of LISTSERV Maestro the list wizard cannot be used again on the same list without loosing all of the changes 25 Figure 20 Create Hosted LISTSERV List Recipient Dataset Details g xYZ Monthly News Dataset Info C astions 7 Name XYZ Company Description XYZ Customer Center Edit Dataset Settings Members 0 0 yet unconfirmed Create Hosted Recipient List Open to everyone Create
347. with the same values in all of the columns selected in the column list below this option they will be considered duplicates Only the first of instance of each will be used for delivery the others will be ignored Select the columns that will be considered for this comparison from the list Use SHIFT and CTRL to select multiple entries 116 The recipient sample at the bottom of the screen is displayed to make it easier to understand the contents of each column This will assist with deciding which columns are to be considered for comparison and which are not to be considered fip Removing duplicates from recipient data can be a useful way to ensure that multiple messages are not sent to the same recipient It is common practice for one person to have more than one e mail address for example a work e mail address and a personal e mail address By creatively selecting one or more criteria to remove duplicates it is possible to avoid sending multiple messages to the same person with different e mail addresses Similarly several recipients may use the same e mail address for example family members sharing an ISP may also share an e mail address In this case it might be desirable to send multiple messages to the same address shared by multiple recipients but addressed to each individual using the e mail account Figure 111 Duplicate Elimination Target Group Definition General Source Source Details Recipients Det
348. with a separating space between each No additional input validation is required Profile Fields Full Name Fields FNAME lt Mandatory gt LNAME lt Mandatory gt USERNAME lt Optional gt Use the arrows to move the profile fields Move up into the name fields Move Down column Name Display Name en Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared field SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field HTML Check the box to receive HTML formatted mail Boolean n a shared field Leave unchecked for text mail PERMISSION Can we quote you in our newsletter Check Boolean n a box for yes Click Next gt to continue 7 3 4 List Type for Moderated Discussion Lists The next screen in the wizard is List type Use the option buttons to select Unmoderated Discussion List 50 e Moderated Discussion List This type of list is used for two way communication Subscribers posts are sent to a list moderator who can approve the message and have it distributed to the list members or reject the message so it is not sent on the list members Figure 48 LISTSERV List Wizard List Type LISTSERY List Definition General Profile Profle Field List Type
349. xt gt Profile Fields Details Specify the details for the profile fields Selection Field Details Subscriber Name Definition Input Field Validation The list below contains all fields of type Text or Number Specify whether the subscriber profile value input for the fields will be restricted Input Validation Settings PRICE Number range z Min fio Max jao Accept all values Number range Number minimum Number maximum Click Next gt to continue 22 To personalize list mailings define the profile field that will be used in the To field of all messages sent to the list This is an optional setting and if left undefined the To field will contain the subscriber s e mail address Select the field or fields that will make up the Name field If more than one field is selected the second one will be added behind the first leaving a space in between This makes it easy to combine a first name field with a last name field to produce a full name field for example Figure 18 Profile Fields Details Subscriber Name Definition Hosted Recipient List Definition General Profile Fields Profile Fields Details Summary Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields Details Specify the details for the profile fields Selection Field Details Subscriber Name Definition Input Field Validation To better personalize your
350. y can be edited removed moved up or moved down by using the corresponding links on the right side of the table Fields that are part of the dataset cannot be moved or edited from this screen Figure 34 LISTSERV List Wizard Profile Fields LISTSERV List Definition r Profile Profile Field General Fields Details Cancel Save amp Exit lt Back Next gt Profile Fields The list below displays the shared fields of the recipient dataset together with the profile fields of the LISTSERV list Click Add Field to add a new field to the list Click on the links next to the list field to select it for editing or to remove the field from the list Name Display Name Data Type Mandatory EMAIL E Mail Address Text Mandatory shared field FNAME First name Text Mandatory shared field These fields LNAME Last name Text Mandatory shared field Delong to the USERNAME Screen name Text Optional shared fied dataset and SOFTWARE Number of XYZ products currently owned Number Optional shared field cannot be DOB Date of birth Text Optional shared field changed from here HTM P torent man ee ne Geena ale permission Can we quote you in our newsletter Cr Boolean gt cetna Reset Remove Add Field Use this link to add a field to the list Click Next gt to continue 7 2 3 Profile Field Details for Unmoderated Discussion Lists The next screen in the wizard is Profile Field Deta

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Red Hat Linux 7.3 The Official Red Hat Linux  Manuale - Hanna Instruments  取扱説明書PDFを開く      MasterSeal 550  VICTRIX 150 - Immergas S.p.A.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file